1
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
© CANON INC. 2017 CT0-D123-A
● Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety Instructions”
(
=
15) section, before using the camera.
● Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera
properly.
● Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future.
● Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.
: Next page
: Previous page
: Page before you clicked a link
● To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at
right.
Camera User Guide
ENGLISH
2
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Compatible Memory Cards
The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used, regardless of
capacity.
● SD memory cards*
1
● SDHC memory cards *
1
*
2
● SDXC memory cards*
1
*
2
*1 Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have been
veried to work with the camera.
*2 UHS-I memory cards are also supported.
Before Use
Package Contents
Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package.
If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer.
Camera
Battery Pack
NB-13L*
Battery Charger
CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
Neck Strap Strap Adapter Lens Cap Lens Cap Cord
* Do not peel off the adhesive covering from a battery pack.
● Printed matter is also included.
● A memory card is not included (
=
2).
3
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Conventions in This Guide
● In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera
buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.
● The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.
Numbers in parentheses indicate the numbers of corresponding
controls in “Part Names” (
=
4).
[ ] Continuous ring (2) on front
[ ] Front dial (3) on front
[ ] Up button (11) on back
[ ] Left button (12) on back
[ ] Right button (18) on back
[ ] Down button (19) on back
[ ] Control dial (16) on back
● Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in
brackets.
● : Important information you should know
●
: Notes and tips for expert camera use
● : Indicates touch-screen operations
●
=
xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents
a page number)
● Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.
● For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as
the “memory card”.
● The symbols “
Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles indicate
how the function is used—whether for still images or movies.
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information
● Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images
were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries
and afliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential
damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory,
including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be
recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable.
● The user’s unauthorized photographing or recording (video and/or
sound) of people or copyrighted materials may invade the privacy of
such people and/or may violate others’ legal rights, including copyright
and other intellectual property rights. Note that restrictions may apply
even when such photographing or recording is intended solely for
personal use.
● The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of
camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before
contacting a Customer Support Help Desk.
● Although the screen (monitor) and viewnder are produced under
extremely high-precision manufacturing conditions and more than
99.99% of the pixels meet design specications, in rare cases some
pixels may be defective or may appear as red or black dots. This does
not indicate camera damage or affect recorded images.
● When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become
warm. This does not indicate damage.
4
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
(
15
)
(
16
)
(
18
)
(
19
)
(
20
)
(
17
)
(
9
)
(
11
)
(
12
)
(
14
)
(
13
)
(
10
)
(
3
)
(
7
)
(
6
)
(
5
)
(
4
)
(
8
)
(
2
)(
1
)
(1) Screen (monitor)*
2
(2) Viewfinder
(3) Power button
(4) Remote switch terminal
(5) DIGITAL terminal
(6) HDMI
TM
terminal
(7) [
(Wi-Fi)] button
(8) Serial number (Body number)
(9) Movie button
(10) [
(AE lock)] button
(11) [
(Drive mode)] /
[
(Single-image erase)] /
Up button
(12) [
(Macro)] / [ (Manual focus)]
/ Left button
(13) Indicator / USB charge lamp
(14) [
(Playback)] button
(15) [
(AF frame selector)] button
(16) Control dial
(17) [
(Quick Set menu/Set)] button
(18) [
(Flash)] / Right button
(19) [
(Information)] /
Down button
(20) [
] button
z You can turn the control dial to perform
most of the operations possible with the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons, such as choosing
items and switching images.
Part Names
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
9
) (
10
)
(
5
)
(
8
)(
7
)(
6
)(
5
)
(
12
)
(
13
)
(
15
)
(
1
)
(
14
)
(
17
)(
16
) (
18
)
(
11
)
(1) Lens
(2) Continuous ring
(3) Front dial
(4) Zoom lever
Shooting: [
(telephoto)] /
[
(wide angle)]
Playback: [
(magnify)] /
[
(index)]
(5) Strap mount
(6) Exposure compensation dial
(7) Shutter button
(8) Flash
(9) Hot shoe
(10) Diopter adjustment dial
(11) Mode dial release button
(12) Mode dial
(13) Speaker
(14) Lamp
(15) Microphone
(16)
(N-Mark)*
1
(17) Tripod socket
(18) Memory card/battery cover
*1 Used with NFC features (
=
144).
*2 Gestures may not be detected as easily if you apply a screen protector. In this
case, increase the sensitivity of the touch-screen panel (
=
176).
5
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Table of Contents
Before Use
Package Contents .................................................................... 2
Compatible Memory Cards....................................................... 2
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information ................................. 3
Conventions in This Guide ....................................................... 3
Part Names .............................................................................. 4
Common Camera Operations ................................................ 13
Safety Instructions .................................................................. 15
Basic Guide
Basic Operations............................................................. 17
Touch-Screen Operations....................................................... 17
Touching ....................................................................................17
Dragging ....................................................................................17
Initial Preparations.................................................................. 18
Attaching Accessories ...............................................................18
Holding the Camera ...................................................................18
Charging the Battery Pack .........................................................19
Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory Card ...................20
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card .....................21
Using the Screen .......................................................................21
Adjusting the Screen Angle and Orientation ..........................21
Setting the Date and Time ......................................................... 21
Changing the Date and Time .................................................22
Display Language ...................................................................... 23
Trying the Camera Out ........................................................... 23
Shooting (Smart Auto) ...............................................................23
Playback ....................................................................................24
Erasing Images .....................................................................25
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics ................................................................ 26
On/Off ..................................................................................... 26
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down) ............................. 27
Shutter Button ........................................................................ 27
Viewnder ............................................................................... 28
Shooting Modes ..................................................................... 29
Shooting Display Options ....................................................... 29
Quick Set Menu ...................................................................... 30
Using Touch-Screen Operations to Congure Settings ............. 30
Menu Screen .......................................................................... 31
Touch-Screen Operations .......................................................... 32
On-Screen Keyboard.............................................................. 32
Indicator Display ..................................................................... 33
Clock ...................................................................................... 34
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ...................................... 35
Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings .......................... 35
Shooting (Smart Auto) ...............................................................35
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode ................................................... 37
Digest Movie Playback ..........................................................38
Still Images/Movies ...............................................................38
Still Images ............................................................................ 38
Movies ...................................................................................39
Scene Icons ............................................................................... 39
Continuous Shooting Scenes ................................................40
Image Stabilization Icons ...........................................................41
On-Screen Frames ....................................................................41
Common, Convenient Features ............................................. 42
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom) .......................... 42
Zooming with the Continuous Ring ............................................42
6
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Other Shooting Modes .................................................... 56
Specic Scenes ...................................................................... 56
Using Functions for Underwater Shots ...................................... 58
Shooting with an Underwater Focus Range .......................... 58
Correcting White Balance ......................................................58
Applying Special Effects ......................................................... 59
Shooting Yourself under Optimal Settings (Self Portrait) ...........59
Making Skin Look Smoother (Smooth Skin) .............................. 60
Shooting Panoramas (Panoramic Shot) .................................... 60
Conveying a Sense of Speed by Blurring the Background
(Panning) ...................................................................................61
Shooting in Monochrome (Grainy B/W) ..................................... 62
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect ..............................................62
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye Effect) ............ 63
Shots Resembling Oil Paintings (Art Bold Effect) ...................... 63
Shots Resembling Watercolors (Water Painting Effect) ............64
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect) ...........64
Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect) .............65
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips) ...........................................................65
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes (High Dynamic Range) ...........66
Adding Artistic Effects ............................................................ 66
Special Modes for Other Purposes ........................................ 67
Shooting Starry Skies (Star) ...................................................... 67
Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies
(Star Nightscape) ..................................................................67
Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails) ...........................................67
Recording Movies of Star Movement
(Star Time-Lapse Movie) .......................................................68
Adjusting Colors ....................................................................70
Adjusting the Focus ............................................................... 71
Using the Self-Timer .................................................................. 42
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake .......................43
Customizing the Self-Timer ...................................................43
Shooting by Touching the Screen (Touch Shutter) ....................44
Continuous Shooting .................................................................44
Shooting with Face ID ............................................................ 45
Personal Information .................................................................45
Registering Face ID Information ................................................ 45
Shooting ....................................................................................46
Checking and Editing Registered Information ...........................47
Overwriting and Adding Face Information .............................48
Erasing Registered Information ............................................. 49
Image Customization Features .............................................. 49
Changing the Aspect Ratio ........................................................ 49
Changing Image Quality ............................................................ 50
Capturing in RAW Format .....................................................50
Using the Menu .....................................................................51
Changing Movie Image Quality .................................................51
For NTSC Video ....................................................................51
For PAL Video ........................................................................52
Helpful Shooting Features ...................................................... 52
Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level ......................................... 52
Deactivating Auto Level .............................................................53
Changing the IS Mode Settings ................................................. 53
Deactivating Image Stabilization ...........................................53
Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Shooting .........................................................................54
Customizing Camera Operation ............................................. 54
Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing ...............................54
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from Lighting Up ......55
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots .......................... 55
7
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Customizing Colors (Picture Style) ............................................ 85
Customizing Picture Styles ....................................................86
Saving Customized Picture Styles ........................................87
Shooting Range and Focusing ............................................... 88
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom) ........................88
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro) .....................................................88
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode ............................................... 89
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking) ....................90
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode) ...................................90
Digital Tele-Converter ................................................................91
Choosing the AF Method ........................................................... 91
1-point AF ..............................................................................91
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (1-point AF) .......................91
+Tracking ............................................................................92
Smooth Zone AF ...................................................................92
Shooting with Servo AF .............................................................93
Changing the Focus Setting ......................................................93
Fine-Tuning the Focus ...............................................................94
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select) ......................... 94
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF) ..............................95
Shooting with AF Lock ............................................................... 95
Flash....................................................................................... 96
Changing the Flash Mode .........................................................96
Auto .......................................................................................96
On ..........................................................................................96
Slow Synchro ........................................................................96
Off .......................................................................................... 96
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation ............................97
Shooting with FE Lock ............................................................... 97
Changing the Flash Timing ........................................................98
Other Settings ........................................................................ 98
Changing the IS Mode Settings ................................................. 98
Recording Various Movies ...................................................... 72
Recording Movies in [
] Mode .................................................72
Locking or Changing Image Brightness ................................72
Disabling Auto Slow Shutter ......................................................73
Correcting Severe Camera Shake .............................................73
Sound Settings ..........................................................................74
Deactivating the Wind Filter ..................................................74
Using the Attenuator .............................................................. 74
Recording Short Clips ................................................................74
Playback Effects ....................................................................74
Recording Time-Lapse Movies (Time-Lapse Movie) .................75
P Mode ............................................................................. 77
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode) ....................................... 77
Image Brightness (Exposure) ................................................. 78
Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation) ............ 78
Deactivating Exposure Simulation .........................................78
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock) ......................78
Changing the Metering Method .................................................79
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame ................79
Changing the ISO Speed ...........................................................80
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings ..................................................80
Changing the Noise Reduction Level (High ISO speed NR) .....80
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting) ...............................81
Adjusting Auto ND Filter Settings ..............................................81
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast
(Auto Lighting Optimizer) ........................................................... 82
Shooting Bright Subjects (Highlight Tone Priority) ..................... 82
Image Colors .......................................................................... 83
Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance) ................................83
Custom White Balance .......................................................... 83
Manually Correcting White Balance ......................................84
Manually Setting White Balance Color Temperature ............. 85
8
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights) .................... 11 3
Histogram ............................................................................ 11 3
RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display .......................... 113
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images
(Digest Movies) ........................................................................ 114
Viewing by Date ................................................................... 114
Checking People Detected in Face ID ..................................... 115
Browsing and Filtering Images ..............................................115
Navigating through Images in an Index ................................... 11 5
Touch-Screen Operations .................................................... 116
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions ....................... 116
Using the Front Dial to Jump between Images ........................ 117
Touch-Screen Operations .................................................... 117
Viewing Individual Images in a Group ..................................... 11 8
Editing Face ID Information ................................................... 119
Changing Names ..................................................................... 119
Erasing Names ........................................................................ 119
Image Viewing Options ........................................................ 120
Magnifying Images ..................................................................120
Touch-Screen Operations ....................................................120
Double-Touch Magnication ................................................120
Viewing Slideshows ................................................................. 121
Protecting Images ................................................................ 121
Using the Menu .......................................................................121
Choosing Images Individually .................................................. 122
Selecting a Range ...................................................................122
Protecting All Images at Once .................................................123
Clearing All Protection at Once ...........................................123
Erasing Images .................................................................... 123
Erasing Multiple Images at Once .............................................124
Choosing a Selection Method .............................................124
Choosing Images Individually ..............................................124
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode ..................................................... 99
Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)...................................... 99
Specic Aperture Values ([Av] Mode) ................................... 100
Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values ([M] Mode) ... 100
Shooting Long Exposures (Bulb).......................................... 101
Adjusting the Flash Output ................................................... 102
Recording Movies at Specic Shutter Speeds and
Aperture Values .................................................................... 102
Customizing Controls and Display ....................................... 103
Customizing Display Information ............................................. 103
Customizing the Information Displayed ............................... 104
Conguring Touch & Drag AF ..................................................104
Changing the Settings of Touch and Drag Operations ........105
Restricting the Area of the Screen Available for Touch
and Drag Operations ...........................................................105
Assigning Functions to Controls .............................................. 105
Customizing the Quick Set Menu ......................................... 107
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu ...................................107
Rearranging Menu Items ..................................................... 107
Saving Shooting Settings ..................................................... 108
Settings That Can Be Saved ...............................................108
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items (My Menu) .....109
Renaming My Menu Tabs .................................................... 110
Deleting a My Menu Tab ...................................................... 110
Deleting All My Menu Tabs or Items .................................... 110
Customizing My Menu Tab Display ..................................... 110
Playback Mode ...............................................................111
Playback ................................................................................ 111
Touch-Screen Operations .................................................... 112
Switching Display Modes ......................................................... 113
Customizing the Shooting Information Displayed ................ 113
9
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Wireless Features ......................................................... 141
Available Wireless Features ................................................. 141
Using Wi-Fi Features ............................................................... 141
Using Bluetooth
®
Features ......................................................141
Sending Images to a Smartphone ........................................ 142
Sending Images to a Bluetooth Enabled Smartphone.............142
Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible Smartphone .............144
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in
Shooting Mode ....................................................................144
Connecting via NFC in Playback Mode ............................... 145
Connecting to a Smartphone via the Wi-Fi Menu ....................146
Using Another Access Point ....................................................147
Previous Access Points ...........................................................148
Saving Images to a Computer .............................................. 149
Preparing to Register a Computer ........................................... 149
Installing CameraWindow ....................................................149
Conguring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only) ...................................................................149
Saving Images to a Connected Computer ...............................150
Conrming Access Point Compatibility ................................ 150
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points ...............................151
Connecting to Listed Access Points ....................................153
Previous Access Points .......................................................153
Sending Images to a Registered Web Service ..................... 154
Registering Web Services .......................................................154
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY ..............................154
Registering Other Web Services .........................................156
Uploading Images to Web Services ........................................156
Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected Printer .......... 157
Sending Images to Another Camera .................................... 159
Image Sending Options ........................................................ 160
Selecting a Range ...............................................................125
Specifying All Images at Once .............................................125
Rotating Images ................................................................... 125
Using the Menu .......................................................................125
Deactivating Auto Rotation ......................................................126
Tagging Images as Favorites ............................................... 126
Using the Menu .......................................................................126
Convenient Control: Touch Actions ...................................... 127
Using Touch Actions Functions ................................................ 127
Changing Touch Actions Functions ......................................... 127
Assignable Functions ..........................................................128
Editing Still Images ............................................................... 128
Resizing Images ......................................................................128
Using the Menu .......................................................................129
Cropping ..................................................................................129
Applying Filter Effects .............................................................. 130
Correcting Red-Eye .................................................................131
Processing RAW Images with the Camera .......................... 132
Using the Menu .......................................................................133
Choosing Images Individually ..............................................133
Selecting a Range ...............................................................133
Editing Movies ...................................................................... 134
Reducing File Sizes ................................................................. 135
Image Quality of Compressed Movies ................................135
Erasing Movie Chapters ..........................................................135
Viewing Albums (Story Highlights) ....................................... 136
Choosing Themes for Albums ............................................. 136
Adding Background Music to Albums ...................................... 137
Creating Your Own Albums ......................................................138
Combining Short Clips.......................................................... 139
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Formatting Memory Cards ....................................................... 171
Low-Level Formatting .......................................................... 171
Changing the Video System ....................................................172
Electronic Level Calibration ..................................................... 172
Resetting the Electronic Level ............................................. 172
Switching the Color of Screen Information ..............................172
Using Eco Mode ......................................................................173
Power-Saving Adjustment .......................................................173
Screen Brightness ...................................................................173
World Clock .............................................................................174
Date and Time .........................................................................174
Lens Retraction Timing ............................................................ 174
Display Language .................................................................... 175
Silencing Camera Operations ..................................................175
Adjusting the Volume ...............................................................175
Customizing Sounds ................................................................175
Start-Up Screen ....................................................................... 175
Hiding Hints and Tips ...............................................................176
Listing Shooting Modes by Icon ...............................................176
Adjusting the Touch-Screen Panel ..........................................176
Metric / Non-Metric Display .....................................................176
Checking Certication Logos ................................................... 176
Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images .................177
Deleting All Copyright Information .......................................177
Adjusting Other Settings .......................................................... 177
Restoring Default Camera Settings ......................................... 177
Restoring All Camera Defaults ............................................177
Restoring Defaults for Individual Functions ......................... 178
Accessories ................................................................... 179
System Map ......................................................................... 180
Optional Accessories ............................................................ 181
Power Supplies ........................................................................181
Sending Multiple Images .........................................................160
Choosing Images Individually ..............................................160
Selecting a Range ...............................................................160
Sending Favorite Images ....................................................161
Notes on Sending Images .......................................................161
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size) ........162
Adding Comments ................................................................... 162
Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync) ....................... 162
Initial Preparations ................................................................... 162
Preparing the Camera .........................................................162
Preparing the Computer ......................................................163
Sending Images .......................................................................163
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a Smartphone.....164
Using a Smartphone to View Camera Images and Control
the Camera........................................................................... 164
Geotagging Images When You Shoot .....................................164
Controlling the Camera Remotely from a Smartphone ............165
Controlling the Camera via Wi-Fi ........................................165
Controlling the Camera via Bluetooth ..................................166
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings.......................................... 167
Editing Connection Information ...............................................167
Changing a Device Nickname .............................................167
Erasing Connection Information ..........................................167
Specifying Images Viewable from Smartphones .................168
Changing the Camera Nickname ........................................168
Returning the Wireless Settings to Default .............................. 169
Clearing Information of Devices Paired via Bluetooth .......... 169
Setting Menu .................................................................. 170
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions ...................................... 170
Date-Based Image Storage ..................................................... 170
File Numbering ........................................................................170
11
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images ............................195
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images .......................... 196
Setting Up Printing for All Images ........................................196
Clearing All Images from the Print List ................................196
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF) .................. 196
Adding Images to a Photobook ...............................................197
Choosing a Selection Method .............................................197
Adding Images Individually ..................................................197
Adding All Images to a Photobook ......................................197
Removing All Images from a Photobook .............................197
Appendix ........................................................................ 198
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 198
On-Screen Messages........................................................... 202
On-Screen Information ......................................................... 204
Shooting (Information Display) ................................................204
Battery Level .......................................................................204
During Playback ......................................................................205
Info Display 1 .......................................................................205
Info Display 2 .......................................................................205
Info Display 3 .......................................................................206
Info Display 4 .......................................................................206
Info Display 5 .......................................................................206
Summary of Movie Control Panel ........................................206
Functions and Menu Tables ................................................. 207
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode ...........................207
Quick Set Menu .......................................................................209
Shooting Tab ............................................................................212
Set Up Tab ............................................................................... 221
My Menu Tab ...........................................................................221
Playback Tab ...........................................................................222
Handling Precautions ........................................................... 222
Flash Units ...............................................................................181
Other Accessories ...................................................................182
Printers ....................................................................................182
Photo and Movie Storage ........................................................ 182
Using Optional Accessories.................................................. 183
Playback on a TV ....................................................................183
Charging via USB .................................................................... 184
Using a Computer to Charge the Battery ............................185
Using a Lens Hood (Sold Separately) .....................................185
Using a Remote Switch (Sold Separately) ..............................186
Using a Timer Remote Controller (Sold Separately) ...............186
Using an External Flash (Sold Separately) ..............................187
Speedlite EX Series ............................................................187
Using Speedlite Bracket SB-E2 (Sold Separately) .............. 188
Camera Settings Available with an External Flash
(Sold Separately) .................................................................188
Using the Software ............................................................... 189
Computer Connections via a Cable ......................................... 189
Checking Your Computer Environment ...............................189
Installing the Software .........................................................189
Saving Images to a Computer ................................................. 189
Printing Images .................................................................... 191
Easy Print ................................................................................191
Conguring Print Settings ........................................................192
Cropping Images before Printing .........................................192
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing ...............193
Available Layout Options ..................................................... 193
Printing ID Photos ...............................................................193
Printing Movie Scenes ............................................................. 194
Movie Printing Options ........................................................194
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF) ..................................194
Conguring Print Settings ....................................................195
12
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Specications ....................................................................... 223
Image Sensor ..........................................................................223
Lens ......................................................................................... 223
Shutter .....................................................................................223
Aperture ................................................................................... 223
Flash ........................................................................................ 223
Viewnder/Monitor ................................................................... 223
Shooting ..................................................................................224
Recording ................................................................................224
Power ......................................................................................225
Interface ...................................................................................225
Operating Environment ............................................................226
Dimensions (CIPA Compliant) .................................................226
Weight (CIPA Compliant) ......................................................... 226
Battery Pack NB-13L ...............................................................226
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE .........................................226
Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E ......................226
Index..................................................................................... 227
Precautions for Wireless Features
(Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or Others)................................................229
Radio Wave Interference Precautions ................................. 229
Security Precautions ...........................................................229
Third-Party Software ...........................................................230
Personal Information and Security Precautions ..................231
Trademarks and Licensing ..................................................231
Disclaimer ............................................................................231
13
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Common Camera Operations
Shoot
● Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)
-
=
35,
=
37
● Shoot yourself under optimal settings (Self Portrait)
-
=
59
● Shoot panoramas (Panoramic Shot)
-
=
60
Shooting people well
Portraits
(
=
56)
Matching specic scenes
Handheld Night
Scene (
=
56)
Under Water
(
=
56)
Fireworks
(
=
56)
Starry Skies
(
=
67)
Applying special effects
Smooth Skin
(
=
60)
Monochrome
(
=
62)
Soft Focus
(
=
62)
Fish-Eye Effect
(
=
63)
Like Oil Paintings
(
=
63)
Like Watercolor Paintings
(
=
64)
Toy Camera Effect
(
=
64)
Miniature Effect
(
=
65)
● Focus on faces
-
=
35,
=
56,
=
92,
=
94
● Without using the ash (Flash Off)
-
=
35
● Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer)
-
=
42
● Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest)
-
=
37
● Convey a sense of speed with a blurred background
-
=
61
14
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Save
● Save images to a computer
-
=
189
Using Wi-Fi Features
● Send images to a smartphone
-
=
142
● Share images online
-
=
154
● Send images to a computer
-
=
162
View
● View images (Playback Mode)
-
=
111
● Automatic playback (Slideshow)
-
=
121
● On a TV
-
=
183
● On a computer
-
=
189
● Browse through images quickly
-
=
115
● Erase images
-
=
123
● Create an album automatically
-
=
136
Record/View Movies
● Record movies
-
=
35,
=
72,
=
102
● View movies (Playback Mode)
-
=
111
Print
● Print pictures
-
=
191
15
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
● Observe the following instructions when using commercially available
batteries or provided battery packs.
- Use batteries/battery packs only with their specied product.
- Do not heat batteries/battery packs or expose them to re.
- Do not charge batteries/battery packs using non-authorized battery
chargers.
- Do not expose the terminals to dirt or let them come into contact with
metallic pins or other metal objects.
- Do not use leaking batteries/battery packs.
- When disposing of batteries/battery packs, insulate the terminals
with tape or other means.
This may cause electric shock, explosion or re.
If a battery/battery pack leaks and the material contacts your skin or
clothing, ush the exposed area thoroughly with running water. In case of
eye contact, ush thoroughly with copious amounts of clean running water
and seek immediate medical assistance.
● Observe the following instructions when using a battery charger or AC
adapter.
- Periodically remove any dust buildup from the power plug and power
outlet using a dry cloth.
- Do not plug in or unplug the product with wet hands.
- Do not use the product if the power plug is not fully inserted into the
power outlet.
- Do not expose the power plug and terminals to dirt or let them come
into contact with metallic pins or other metal objects.
● Do not touch the battery charger or AC adapter connected to a power
outlet during lightning storms.
● Do not place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not damage, break
or modify the power cord.
● Do not wrap the product in cloth or other materials when in use or
shortly after use when the product is still warm in temperature.
● Do not leave the product connected to a power source for long periods
of time.
This may cause electric shock, explosion or re.
Safety Instructions
Be sure to read these instructions in order to operate the product safely.
Follow these instructions to prevent injury or harm to the operator of the
product or others.
WARNING
Denotes the risk of serious injury or death.
● Keep the product out of the reach of young children.
A strap wrapped around a person’s neck may result in strangulation.
● Use only power sources specied in this instruction manual for use
with the product.
● Do not disassemble or modify the product.
● Do not expose the product to strong shocks or vibration.
● Do not touch any exposed internal parts.
● Stop using the product in any case of unusual circumstances such as
the presence of smoke or a strange smell.
● Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine or paint thinner
to clean the product.
● Do not get the product wet. Do not insert foreign objects or liquids into
the product.
● Do not insert foreign objects or liquids into the product.
● Do not use the product where ammable gases may be present.
This may cause electric shock, explosion or re.
● For products featuring a viewnder, do not look through the viewnder
at strong light sources such as the sun on a bright day or lasers and
other strong articial light sources.
This may harm your vision.
16
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
CAUTION
Denotes the possibility of property damage.
● Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a
clear day or an intense articial light source.
Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components.
● When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be
careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.
● Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the ash with a
cotton swab or cloth.
The heat emitted from the ash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the
product to malfunction.
● Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using
the product.
Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.
● Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with
tape or other insulators.
Contacting other metal materials may lead to re or explosions.
● Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use. Do
not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use.
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to
overheat and distort, resulting in re.
● Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating, or
explosion, resulting in product damage or re.
● If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that
have different levels of charge together, and do not use old and
new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and –
terminals reversed.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
● Do not allow the product to maintain contact with the same area of skin
for extended periods of time during use.
This may result in low-temperature contact burns, including skin redness
and blistering, even if the product does not feel hot. The use of a tripod or
similar equipment is recommended when using the product in hot places
and for people with circulation problems or less sensitive skin.
● Follow any indications to turn off the product in places where its use is
forbidden.
Not doing so may cause other equipment to malfunction due to the effect
of electromagnetic waves and even result in accidents.
CAUTION
Denotes the risk of injury.
● Do not re the ash near the eyes.
It may hurt the eyes.
● Strap is intended for use on the body only. Hanging the strap with any
product attached on a hook or other object may damage the product.
Also, do not shake the product or expose the product to strong
impacts.
● Do not apply strong pressure on the lens or allow an object to hit it.
This may cause injury or damage to the product.
● Flash emits high temperatures when red. Keep ngers, any other
part of your body, and objects away from the ash unit while taking
pictures.
This may cause burns or malfunction of the ash.
● Do not leave the product in places exposed to extremely high or low
temperatures.
The product may become extremely hot/cold and cause burns or injury
when touched.
17
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Touch-Screen Operations
The camera’s touch-screen panel enables intuitive operation simply by
touching or tapping the screen.
Touching
Touch the screen briey with your
nger.
z This gesture is used to shoot, congure
camera functions, and so on.
Dragging
Touch the screen and move your nger
across it.
z This gesture is used in Playback mode
to switch to the next image, or to change
the magnied image area, among other
operations.
Basic information and instructions, from initial
preparations to shooting and playback
Basic Guide
Basic Operations
18
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
z Thread the smaller loop through the lens
cap to attach it as shown, and then attach
the lens cap cord to the strap.
z Always remove the lens cap before
turning the camera on. Try clipping the
lens cap to the strap when the cap is not
in use.
z Keep the lens cap on the lens when the
camera is not in use.
Holding the Camera
z Place the strap around your neck.
z When shooting, keep your arms close to
your body and hold the camera securely
to prevent it from moving. If you have
raised the ash, do not rest your ngers
on it.
(
2
)
(
1
)
Initial Preparations
Prepare for shooting as follows.
Attaching Accessories
1
Attach the strap adapter.
z Attach the included strap adapter to the
camera as shown.
z On the other side of the camera, attach
the strap adapter the same way.
2
Attach the strap.
z Attach the included strap to the strap
adapter as shown.
z On the other side of the camera, attach
the strap the same way.
3
Attach the lens cap.
z Remove the lens cap from the lens
momentarily.
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
(
2
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
1
)
19
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
● To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
● For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach
the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in
malfunction or damage to the product.
● The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
● For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
“Power” (
=
225).
● Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
● As a visual reminder of the charge status, attach the battery cover
with
visible on a charged battery pack and concealed on an
uncharged one.
Charging the Battery Pack
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to
charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the
battery pack charged.
1
Insert the battery pack.
z After aligning the marks on the battery
pack and charger, insert the battery pack
by pushing it in (1) and down (2).
2
Charge the battery pack.
z CB-2LH: Flip out the plug (1) and plug
the charger into a power outlet (2).
z CB-2LHE: Plug the power cord into the
charger, then plug the other end into a
power outlet.
z The charging lamp turns orange, and
charging begins.
z When charging is nished, the lamp turns
green.
3
Remove the battery pack.
z After unplugging the battery charger,
remove the battery pack by pushing it in
(1) and up (2).
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
2
)
CB-2LH
CB-2LHE
(
2
)
(
1
)
20
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
3
Check your card’s write-protect
switch and insert the memory card.
z Recording is not possible on memory
cards with a write-protect switch when the
switch is in the locked position. Move the
switch toward (1).
z Insert the memory card with the label (2)
facing as shown until it clicks into place.
z Make sure the memory card is facing the
right way when you insert it. Inserting
memory cards facing the wrong way may
damage the camera.
4
Close the cover.
z Lower the cover (1) and hold it down as
you slide the switch, until it clicks into the
closed position (2).
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory
Card
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).
Note that before using a memory card that is new or has been formatted
in another device, you should format the memory card with this camera
(
=
171).
1
Open the cover.
z Slide the switch (1) and open the cover
(2).
2
Insert the battery pack.
z Holding the battery pack with the
terminals in the position shown (1), hold
the battery lock toward (2) and insert
the battery pack toward (3) until the lock
clicks shut.
z If you insert the battery pack facing the
wrong way, it cannot be locked into the
correct position. Always conrm that the
battery pack is facing the right way and
locks when inserted.
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
1
)
21
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Adjusting the Screen Angle and Orientation
z You can adjust the angle and orientation
of the screen as needed, to suit shooting
conditions.
z To protect the screen when the camera
is not in use, always keep it closed and
facing the camera body.
● Open the screen to activate it when the camera is on. This will
deactivate the viewnder. Similarly, close the screen (facing the
camera body) to deactivate it and activate the viewnder.
● When including yourself in shots, you can view a mirror image
of yourself by rotating the screen around toward the front of the
camera. To cancel reverse display, press the [
] button,
choose [Reverse Display] on the [
1] tab, press the [ ] button,
and then press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [Off].
Setting the Date and Time
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen
is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this
way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when
you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.
1
Turn the camera on.
z Press the power button.
z The [Date/Time] screen is displayed.
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Remove the battery pack.
z Open the cover and press the battery
lock in the direction of the arrow.
z The battery pack will pop up.
Remove the memory card.
z Push the memory card in until it clicks,
and then slowly release it.
z The memory card will pop up.
Using the Screen
z Open the screen (1) and rotate it toward
the lens 180° (2).
z Close the screen in this orientation (3).
● The screen can only open to approximately 180° in direction (1).
Be careful not to open the screen any further than this, as it will
damage the camera.
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
1
)
22
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Changing the Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
1
Access the menu screen.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [Date/Time].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ 2] tab.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Date/Time], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Change the date and time.
z Follow step 2 in “Setting the Date and
Time” (
=
21) to adjust the settings.
z Press the [
] button to close the
menu screen.
● Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the
camera’s built-in date/time battery (backup battery) after the
battery pack is removed.
● The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you
insert a charged battery pack, even if the camera is left off.
● Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will
be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date
and time as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (
=
21).
2
Set the date and time.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the date and time.
z When nished, press the [ ] button.
3
Specify your home time zone.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your
home time zone.
4
Finish the setup process.
z Press the [ ] button when nished.
After a conrmation message, the setting
screen is no longer displayed.
z To turn off the camera, press the power
button.
● Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/
Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on.
Specify the correct information.
● To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2
and then choose [
] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [
] dial.
● You can also set the date and time by touching the desired item
on the screen in step 2 and then touching [
][ ], followed
by [
]. Similarly, you can also set your home time zone by
touching [
][ ] on the screen in step 3, followed by [ ].
23
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Trying the Camera Out
Still Images
Movies
Try out the camera by turning it on, shooting some still images or movies,
and viewing them.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
1
Turn the camera on.
z Press the power button.
z The startup screen is displayed.
2
Enter [ ] mode.
z Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
z Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
z Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
upper left of the screen.
z Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
3
Zoom in or out, as needed.
z To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle).
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
1
Enter Playback mode.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Access the setting screen.
z Press and hold the [ ] button, and then
immediately press the [ ] button.
3
Set the display language.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
z Once the display language has been set,
the setting screen is no longer displayed.
● The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after
pressing the [
] button before you press the [ ] button.
In this case, press the [
] button to dismiss the time display and
repeat step 2.
● You can also change the display language by pressing the
[
] button and choosing [Language ] on the [ 3] tab.
● You can also set the display language by touching a language on
the screen in step 3 and then touching it again.
24
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Recording Movies
1) Start recording.
z Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
time (1).
z Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
z Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
z Once recording begins, take your nger
off the movie button.
2) Stop recording.
z Press the movie button again to stop
recording. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
Playback
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1
Enter Playback mode.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Your last shot is displayed.
(
1
)
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
z Press the shutter button lightly, halfway
down. The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and frames are displayed to
indicate image areas in focus.
z If [Raise the ash] is displayed, lift the
ash with your ngers. It will re when
shooting. If you prefer not to use the
ash, push it down with your nger, into
the camera.
2) Shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way
down.
z As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the ash, it res
automatically.
z Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
z After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
25
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
● You can also start movie playback by touching [ ]. To adjust
the volume, quickly drag up or down across the screen during
playback.
Erasing Images
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.
1
Choose an image to erase.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
2
Erase the image.
z Press the [ ] button.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the [ ]
button.
z The current image is now erased.
z To cancel erasure, press the [
][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
● You can choose multiple images to erase at once (
=
124).
● You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the
screen in step 2.
● Images can also be erased by using Touch Actions (
=
127).
2
Choose images.
z To view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
[ ] dial clockwise.
z Press and hold the [ ][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
z To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), turn the [
] dial rapidly. In this
mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through
images.
z To return to single-image display, press
the [ ] button.
z Movies are identied by a [
] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
3
Play movies.
z Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button again.
z Playback now begins, and after the movie
is nished, [
] is displayed.
z To adjust the volume, press the [
][ ]
buttons during playback.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
26
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
On/Off
Shooting Mode
z Press the power button to turn the
camera on and prepare for shooting.
z To turn the camera off, press the power
button again.
Playback Mode
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on and view your shots.
z To turn the camera off, press the [
]
button again.
● To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the [ ]
button.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway (
=
27).
● The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera
is in Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is
retracted by pressing the [
] button.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your
camera, including shooting and playback options
27
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Shutter Button
To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter
button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all
the way down to shoot.
In this guide, shutter button operations are described as pressing the
button halfway or all the way down.
1
Press halfway. (Press lightly to
focus.)
z Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice, and frames are
displayed around image areas in focus.
2
Press all the way down. (From the
halfway position, press fully to
shoot.)
z The camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
z Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
● Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing
the shutter button halfway.
● Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time
required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes,
and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject
moves) before the shutter sound ends.
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates
the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specic period of
inactivity.
The screen is automatically deactivated after about a minute of inactivity,
and in another minute, the lens is retracted and the camera turns itself off.
To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off but
the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway (
=
27).
● You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of
Display Off, if you prefer (
=
173).
● Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other
devices via Wi-Fi (
=
141), or when connected to a computer
(
=
189).
28
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
● Although the viewnder is produced under extremely high-precision
manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the pixels meet
design specications, in rare cases some pixels may be defective
or may appear as red or black dots. This does not indicate camera
damage or affect recorded images.
● Some aspect ratio settings (
=
49) will cause black bars to be
displayed on the top and bottom or left and right edges of the
screen. These areas will not be recorded.
● The screen will not be activated when you move your eye away
from the viewnder if you have selected MENU (
=
31) > [ 1]
tab > [Display settings] > [Display Control] > [Manual] and then
[Manual display] > [Viewnder].
● Display of shooting information will not be adjusted when you
hold the camera vertically if you have selected MENU (
=
31) >
[
1] tab > [Shooting information display] > [VF vertical display]
> [Off].
● Display switches from the viewnder to the camera screen for
some features.
● You can congure display brightness (
=
173) for the viewnder
and camera screen separately.
● To reduce the shooting screen, choose MENU (
=
31) > [ 2]
tab > [VF display format] > [Display 2].
Viewnder
Still Images
Movies
Shooting is easier with a viewnder, which helps you concentrate on
keeping subjects in focus.
1
Switch between using the screen
and viewnder as needed.
z Moving the viewnder near your eye will
activate its display and deactivate the
camera screen.
z Moving the viewnder away from your
eye will deactivate its display and activate
the camera screen.
2
Adjust the diopter.
z Turn the dial to bring viewnder images
into sharp focus.
● The viewnder display and camera screen cannot be activated at
the same time.
29
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Shooting Display Options
Press the [ ] button to show or hide the grid lines and electronic level.
To congure the on-screen display in greater detail, access [ 1] tab >
[Shooting information display] (
=
103).
● Open the screen to activate it when the camera is on. This will
deactivate the viewnder. Similarly, close the screen (facing
the camera body) to deactivate it and activate the viewnder
(
=
21).
● Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view
function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier
to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image
brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that
any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not
affect recorded images.
● For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes”
(
=
113).
Shooting Modes
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode. As you turn it, hold
down the mode dial release button in the middle of the dial.
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(1) P, Tv, Av, M, C1, and C2 Modes
Take a variety of shots using
your preferred settings (
=
77,
=
99).
(2) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Fully automatic shooting, with
camera-determined settings
(
=
23,
=
35,
=
37).
(3) Special Scene Mode
Shoot with settings designed for
specic scenes, or add a variety of
effects (
=
56).
(4) Movie Mode
For shooting movies (
=
72,
=
102).
You can also shoot movies when
the mode dial is not set to Movie
mode, simply by pressing the
movie button.
30
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (
=
177).
● You can also exit by choosing [
] in the menu items and
pressing the [
] button.
Using Touch-Screen Operations to Congure
Settings
z Touch [ ] in the upper right of the screen
to access the Quick Set menu.
z Touch a menu item and then an option to
complete the setting.
z To return to the previous screen, touch
the [
] menu item, or touch the selected
option again.
z You can access the screen for options
labeled with a [ ] icon by touching
[ ].
z You can access the screen for options
labeled with a [ ] icon by touching [ ].
Quick Set Menu
Congure commonly used functions in the (Quick Set) menu.
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
(
=
209).
1
Access the menu.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a menu item.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
menu item (1).
z Available options (2) are shown at the
bottom of the screen.
3
Choose an option.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
or [ ] dial to choose an option.
z Items labeled with a [ ] icon can
be congured by pressing the [ ]
button.
z Items labeled with a [ ] icon can be
congured by pressing the [ ] button.
z Items labeled with a [ ] icon can be
congured by turning the [
] dial.
4
Conrm your choice and exit.
z Press the [ ] button.
z The screen before you pressed the
[
] button in step 1 is displayed again,
showing the option you congured.
(
1
) (
2
)
31
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
3
Choose a menu item.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button.
z For menu items with options not shown,
rst press the [ ] button to switch
screens, and then either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to select the
menu item.
z To return to the previous screen, press
the [ ] button.
4
Choose an option.
z When options are listed vertically, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose an option.
z When options are listed horizontally,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option.
5
Conrm your choice and exit.
z Press the [ ] button to conrm your
choice and return to the menu item
selection screen.
z Press the [
] button to return to the
screen displayed before you pressed the
[ ] button in step 1.
● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (
=
177).
● Available menu items vary depending on the selected shooting or
playback mode (
=
212 –
=
222).
Menu Screen
Congure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as
follows.
1
Access the menu screen.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a tab.
z Tabs represent functions (1), such as
shooting ([ ]), playback ([ ]), or
settings ([ ]), or pages within each
function (2). Tabs are identied in this
guide by combining the function and
page, as in [ 1].
z Move the zoom lever to choose the
function tab, and then press the [
][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
the page tab.
32
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
On-Screen Keyboard
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Face ID (
=
45),
wireless connections (
=
141), and so on. Note that the length and type
of information you can enter varies depending on the function you are
using.
Entering Characters
z Touch the characters to enter them.
z The amount of information you can enter
(1) varies depending on the function you
are using.
Moving the Cursor
z Touch [ ][ ].
Entering Line Breaks
z Touch [ ].
Switching Input Modes
z To switch to numbers or symbols, touch
[ ].
z Touch [ ] to enter capital letters.
z Available input modes vary depending on
the function you are using.
Deleting Characters
z Touch [ ] to delete the previous
character.
z Touching and holding [
] will delete ve
characters at a time.
(
1
)
Touch-Screen Operations
● To choose tabs, press the [ ] button to access the menu screen,
and then touch the desired function tab and page tab.
● Drag the menu items up or down to scroll them, or touch a menu item
to choose it.
● Touch an option to complete the setting and return to the menu item
selection screen.
● For menu items displayed with a bar to indicate the level, touch the
desired position on the bar.
● To congure menu items for which options are not shown, rst touch
the menu item to access the setting screen. On the setting screen,
either drag or touch to choose the item, and then touch to choose the
option. To return to the previous screen, touch [
].
● You can also touch input elements (such as check boxes or text elds)
to select them, and you can enter text by touching the on-screen
keyboard.
● When [
] is shown, you can touch [ ] instead of pressing the
[ ] button, if you prefer.
● When [ ] is shown, you can touch [ ] instead of pressing the
[ ] button, if you prefer.
● When [ ] is shown, you can touch [ ] instead of pressing the
[ ] button, if you prefer.
● To dismiss the menu, press the [
] button again.
33
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Indicator Display
The indicator on the back of the camera (
=
4) lights up or blinks
depending on the camera status.
Color
Indicator
Status
Camera Status
Green Blinking
Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting
images, shooting long exposures (
=
99,
=
100), connected to a computer
(
=
189), connecting/transmitting via Wi-Fi,
or display off (
=
27,
=
173)
Orange On Charging via USB
● When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open
the memory card/battery cover, or shake or hit the camera. Doing
so may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.
Conrming Input and Returning to the
Previous Screen
z Press the [ ] button.
● For some functions, [ ] is not displayed and cannot be used.
● Another way to use the keyboard is by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons or turning the [
] dial to select characters or icons, and
then pressing the [
] button. You can also move the cursor by
turning the [
] dial. To return to the previous screen, press the
[
] button.
34
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Clock
You can check the current time.
z Press and hold the [
] button.
z The current time appears.
z Clock display switches to vertical
orientation when the camera is held
vertically while the clock is displayed.
z To change the display color, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial.
z Press the [ ] button again to cancel the
clock display.
● To display the clock when the camera is off, press and hold the
[
] button, and then press the power button.
35
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Shooting with Camera-Determined
Settings
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Still Images
Movies
1
Turn the camera on.
z Press the power button.
z The startup screen is displayed.
2
Enter [ ] mode.
z Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
z Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
z Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in
the upper left of the screen (
=
39,
=
41).
z Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control
over shooting
36
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2) Shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way
down.
z As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the ash, it res
automatically.
z Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
z After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
Recording Movies
1) Start recording.
z Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
time (1).
z Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
z Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
z Once recording begins, take your nger
off the movie button.
(
1
)
3
Zoom in or out, as needed.
z To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle). (A zoom
bar (1) showing the zoom position is
displayed, along with the range of focus
(2).)
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
z Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice after focusing, and
frames are displayed to indicate image
areas in focus.
z If [Raise the ash] is displayed, lift the
ash with your ngers. It will re when
shooting. If you prefer not to use the
ash, push it down with your nger, into
the camera.
(
1
)
(
2
)
37
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2
Compose the shot.
z Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart
Auto)” (
=
35) to compose the shot and
focus.
z For more impressive digest movies,
aim the camera at subjects about four
seconds before shooting still images.
3
Shoot.
z Follow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(
=
35) to shoot a still image.
z The camera records both a still image
and movie clip. The clip, which ends with
the still image and a shutter sound, forms
a single chapter in the digest movie.
● Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [ ] mode, because
digest movies are recorded for each shot.
● A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [
] mode, or
operating the camera in other ways.
● Sounds and vibrations from operating the camera will be recorded
in digest movies.
2) Adjust how the shot is composed,
as needed.
z To resize the subject, repeat the
operations in step 3.
However, note that the sound of camera
operations will be recorded. Note that
movies shot at zoom factors shown in
blue will look grainy.
z When you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors will be
automatically adjusted.
3) Stop recording.
z Press the movie button again to stop
recording. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
z Recording will stop automatically when
the memory card becomes full.
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Movies
You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The
camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are
later combined in a digest movie.
Clips recorded in this mode may be included in Story Highlights albums
(
=
136).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Follow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(
=
35) and choose [ ].
38
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
● A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be
blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a
tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
● If your shots are dark despite the ash ring, move closer to the
subject. For details on the ash range, see “Flash” (
=
223).
● The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once
when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the
range of focus (shooting range), see “Lens” (
=
223).
● To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be lit
when shooting in low-light conditions.
● A blinking [
] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot
indicates that shooting is not possible until the ash has nished
recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the ash is ready,
so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or
release it and press it again.
● No shutter sound is played when “Sleeping” and “Sleeping
Babies” icons (
=
39) are displayed.
● Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen
is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus,
brightness, and colors used.
● You can change how long images are displayed after shots
(
=
55).
● Digest movie image quality is automatically set to [ ] for
NTSC or [
] for PAL and cannot be changed (
=
172).
● Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway
or trigger the self-timer (
=
175).
● Digest movies are saved as separate movie les in the following
cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [
] mode.
- The digest movie le size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the
total recording time reaches approximately 16 minutes and 40
seconds.
- The digest movie is protected (
=
121).
- Daylight saving time (
=
21) or time zone (
=
174) settings
are changed.
- A new folder is created (
=
170).
● Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modied or erased.
● If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust
the setting in advance. Choose MENU (
=
31) > [ 6] tab >
[Digest Type] > [No Stills].
● Individual chapters can be edited (
=
135).
Digest Movie Playback
Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play the digest movie created
on the same day, or specify the date of the digest movie to play (
=
114).
Still Images/Movies
● If the camera makes no operating sounds, it may have been
turned on while holding down the [
] button. To activate
sounds, press the [
] button, choose [Mute] on the [ 3]
tab, and then choose [Disable].
39
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Scene Icons
Still Images
Movies
In [
] and [ ] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera
are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.
Depending on the scene, continuous images may be shot (
=
40).
Subject
Background
Normal Backlit Dark*
1
Sunsets Spotlights
People
*
2
*
3
–
Moving People
*
3
*
3
– – –
Shadows on Face
*
2
– – – –
Smiling
*
3
*
3
– – –
Sleeping
*
2
*
3
– – –
Babies
*
3
*
3
– – –
Smiling Babies
*
3
*
3
– – –
Sleeping Babies
*
2
*
3
– – –
Moving Children
*
3
*
3
– – –
Other Subjects
*
2
*
3
Other Moving Subjects
*
3
*
3
– – –
Other Close-Range
Subjects
*
2
*
3
– –
*1 Tripod used.
*2 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds.
*3 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
and gray for all other backgrounds.
Movies
● Before movie recording, lower the ash with your nger. During
recording, keep your ngers away from the microphone (1).
Leaving the ash raised, or blocking the microphone may prevent
audio from being recorded or may cause the recording to sound
mufed.
● Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when
recording movies, because sounds made by the camera will be
recorded.
● Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of signicant
camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before
shooting, follow the steps in “Recording Movies with Subjects at
the Same Size Shown before Shooting” (
=
54).
(
1
)
● Audio is recorded in stereo.
40
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Continuous Shooting Scenes
The camera shoots continuously when you take a shot while an icon
for one of the following scenes is displayed. Pressing the shutter button
halfway while one of the scene icons is displayed shows another icon
([ ], [ ], or [ ]) indicating the type of continuous shooting to be used.
Smiling
(including Babies)
Consecutive images are captured, and the camera
analyzes details such as facial expressions to save
the image determined to be the best.
Sleeping
(including Babies)
Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by
combining consecutive shots to reduce camera
shake and image noise.
The AF-assist beam and the ash will not re, and
the shutter sound will not be played.
Children
So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children
who move around, the camera will capture three
consecutive images for each shot.
● In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images
may not look as expected.
● Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the rst
shot.
● When you want to shoot single images only, press the [ ] button,
and then select [
] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[
] dial).
● The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] is dark blue,
and the background color of [ ] is orange.
● For movies, only People, Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range
Subjects icons are displayed.
● In [
] mode, icons are only displayed for People, Shadows on Face,
Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range Subjects.
● For self-timer shots, icons are not displayed for the following subjects:
moving, smiling, or sleeping people; smiling or sleeping babies;
moving children; and other moving subjects.
● Icons are not displayed for smiling or sleeping subjects and moving
children in drive modes other than [
] (
=
40,
=
44).
● Backlit icons are not displayed for moving children and smiling people
when the ash is set to [
].
● Icons for babies (including smiling and sleeping babies) and moving
children are displayed when [Face ID] is set to [On] and faces of
registered babies (less than two years old) or children (2 – 12 years
old) are detected (
=
45). Conrm beforehand that the date and time
are correct (
=
21).
● Try shooting in [ ] mode (
=
77) if the scene icon does not
match actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot
with your expected effect, color, or brightness.
41
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
On-Screen Frames
Still Images
Movies
In [
] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera
detects subjects you are aiming the camera at.
● A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)
detected as the main subject. Frames follow moving subjects within a
certain range as they are tracked to keep them in focus.
● When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus
and image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).
● Try shooting in [ ] mode (
=
77) if no frames are displayed, if
frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are
displayed on the background or similar areas.
● To choose subjects to focus on, touch the desired subject on the
screen. [
] is displayed, and the camera enters Touch AF mode
(
=
95). Pressing the shutter button halfway will display a blue
frame, and the camera will keep the subject in focus and image
brightness adjusted (Servo AF).
Image Stabilization Icons
Still Images
Movies
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions (Intelligent IS) is
automatically applied, and the following icons are displayed.
Image stabilization for still images (Normal)
Image stabilization for still images when panning (Panning)*
Image stabilization for angular camera shake and shift-shake in
macro shots (Hybrid IS).
For movies, [ ] is displayed and [ ] image stabilization is also
applied.
Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake, as
when recording while walking (Dynamic)
Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when
recording movies at telephoto (Powered)
No image stabilization, because the camera is mounted on
a tripod or held still by other means. However, during movie
recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization to counteract
wind or other sources of vibration is used (Tripod IS).
* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you
follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical
camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow
subjects moving vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera
shake.
● To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (
=
53). In
this case, an IS icon is not displayed.
● [
] is not available in [ ] mode.
42
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● To deactivate digital zoom, choose MENU (
=
31) > [ 3] tab
> [Digital Zoom] > [Off].
Zooming with the Continuous Ring
Still Images
Movies
Use the continuous ring for ner subject resizing and faster zooming than
with the zoom lever.
z Turn the [
] ring counterclockwise to
zoom in or clockwise to zoom out.
Using the Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other
timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the
shutter button.
1
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
30).
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Common, Convenient Features
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)
Still Images
Movies
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,
use digital zoom for up to about 12x enlargement.
1
Move the zoom lever toward [ ].
z Hold the lever until zooming stops.
z Zooming stops at the largest zoom factor
before the image becomes noticeably
grainy, which is then indicated on the
screen.
2
Move the zoom lever toward [ ]
again.
z The camera zooms in even closer on the
subject.
z (1) is the current zoom factor.
● Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates
the zoom position). The zoom bar is color-coded to indicate the
zoom range.
- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not
appear grainy.
- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not
noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus).
- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear
grainy.
● Because the blue range will not be available at some recording
pixel settings (
=
50), the maximum zoom factor can be
achieved by following step 1.
(
1
)
43
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Customizing the Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).
1
Choose [ ].
z Following step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
42), choose [ ] and press the [ ]
button.
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
delay time or number of shots.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a value, and then press the
[ ] button twice.
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
z Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
42) to shoot.
● For movies recorded using the self-timer, recording begins after
your specied delay time, but specifying the number of shots has
no effect.
● When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and color tone
are determined by the rst shot. More time is required between
shots when the ash res or when you have specied to take
many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the memory
card becomes full.
● When a delay longer than two seconds is specied, two seconds
before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed
up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the ash res.)
2
Shoot.
z For Still Images: Press the shutter button
halfway to focus on the subject, and then
press it all the way down.
z For Movies: Press the movie button.
z Once you start the self-timer, the lamp
will blink and the camera will play a self-
timer sound.
z Two seconds before the shot, the blinking
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remain lit in case the ash res.)
z To cancel shooting after the self-timer
has been triggered, press the [
]
button.
z To restore the original setting, choose [ ]
in step 1.
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
Still Images
Movies
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you
have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are
pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.
z Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
42) and choose [ ].
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
z Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
42) to shoot.
44
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Continuous Shooting
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot
continuously.
For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Shooting” (
=
224).
1
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] or
[ ] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] or
[ ] is displayed.
2
Shoot.
z Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
● During continuous shooting, the focus, exposure, and colors are
locked at the position/level determined when you pressed the
shutter button halfway.
● Cannot be used with the self-timer (
=
42).
● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
● Shooting may slow down if the ash res.
● With Touch Shutter (
=
44), the camera shoots continuously
while you touch the screen. Focus and exposure during
continuous shooting remain constant, after they are determined
for the rst shot.
Shooting by Touching the Screen
(Touch Shutter)
Still Images
Movies
With this option, instead of pressing the shutter button, you can simply
touch the screen and release your nger to shoot. The camera will focus
on subjects and adjust image brightness automatically.
1
Enable the touch-shutter function.
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[ 2] tab > [Touch Shutter] > [Touch
Shutter] > [Enable] (
=
31).
2
Shoot.
z Touch the subject on the screen to take
the picture.
z The camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
z To cancel touch shutter, choose [Disable]
in step 1.
● Even while the shot is displayed, you can prepare for the next
shot by touching [
].
45
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Registering Face ID Information
You can register information (face info, names, and birthdays) for up to 12
people to use with Face ID.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the [ 2] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
31).
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add to Registry], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a New Face], and
then press the [ ] button.
2
Register face information.
z Aim the camera so that the face of the
person you want to register is inside the
gray frame at the center of the screen.
z A white frame on the person’s face
indicates that the face is recognized.
Make sure a white frame is displayed on
the face, and then shoot.
z If the face is not recognized, you cannot
register face information.
Shooting with Face ID
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s
face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when
shooting. In [ ] mode, the camera can detect babies and children
based on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when
shooting.
This function also enables you to nd shots you have taken that include
registered people (
=
116).
Registering people in advance also makes it easier to add them when
creating Story Highlights albums (
=
136).
Personal Information
● The camera stores face information (face images) registered using
Face ID, as well as entered personal information (names and
birthdays). Additionally, when registered people are detected, their
names will be recorded in still images. For this reason, after using
Face ID functions, be careful when giving the camera or images to
others, or when posting images online where many people can view
them.
● When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after
using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces,
names, and birthdays) from the camera (
=
49).
46
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
5
Continue registering face
information.
z To register up to 4 more points of face
information (expressions or angles),
repeat step 2.
z Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
● The ash will not re when following step 2.
● If you do not register a birthday in step 3, Babies or Children icons
(
=
39) will not be displayed in [ ] mode.
● You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if
you have not lled all 5 face info slots (
=
45).
Shooting
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that
person as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for
that person when shooting.
z When you point the camera toward
people, the name of the person detected
as the main subject is displayed.
z Shoot.
z Displayed names will be recorded in still
images. The names of detected people
(maximum total of 5) will be recorded,
even if the names are not displayed.
z After [Register?] is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
z The [Edit Prole] screen is displayed.
3
Register the person’s name and
birthday.
z Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the name
(
=
32).
z To register a birthday, on the [Edit Prole]
screen, choose [Birthday] (either press
the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the date.
z When nished, press the [
] button.
4
Save the settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Save], and then press the
[ ] button.
z After a message is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Yes], and then press the [
]
button.
47
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Checking and Editing Registered Information
1
Access the [Check/Edit Info] screen.
z Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
45), choose [Check/
Edit Info].
2
Choose a person to check or edit
their information.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the person whose information you want
to check or edit, and then press the [ ]
button.
3
Check or edit the information as
needed.
z To check a name or birthday, choose [Edit
Prole] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button. On the screen displayed,
you can edit the name or birthday as
described in step 3 of “Registering Face
ID Information” (
=
45).
z To check face information, choose [Face
Info List] (either press the [
][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button. To erase face information,
press the [
] button on the screen
displayed, choose face information to
erase by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons or turning the [ ] dial, and then
press the [ ] button. After [Erase?] is
displayed, choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
● People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected
as the registered person if they share similar facial features.
● Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured
image or scene differs drastically from the registered face
information.
● If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected,
overwrite registered information with new face info. Registering
face info right before shooting will allow for easier detection of
registered faces.
● If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you
continue shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the
image during playback (
=
119).
● Because faces of babies and children change as they grow, you
should update their face info regularly (
=
48).
● Names will still be recorded in images even if you clear the
[Shooting Info] check box in “Customizing the Information
Displayed” (
=
104) so that the names are not displayed.
● If you don’t want names to be recorded in images, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the [
2] tab, choose [Face ID], and then choose
[Off].
● You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen
(simple information display) (
=
113).
● Names recorded in continuous shooting (
=
44) continue to be
recorded in the same position as the rst shot, even if subjects
move.
48
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Choose the face info to overwrite.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the face info to
overwrite, and then press the [ ] button.
4
Register face information.
z Follow step 2 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
45) to shoot, and then
register the new face information.
z Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
● You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are lled.
Follow the steps above to overwrite face information.
● You can follow the above steps to register new face info when
there is at least one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite
any face information. Instead of overwriting face info, rst erase
unwanted existing info (
=
49), and then register new face
information (
=
45) as needed.
● Even if you change names in [Edit Prole], the names recorded in
previously shot images will remain the same.
Overwriting and Adding Face Information
You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should
update face information regularly, especially with babies and children,
because their faces change as they grow.
As long as all 5 face info slots have not been lled, you can also add face
information.
1
Access the [Add Face Info] screen.
z Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
45), choose [Add Face
Info].
2
Choose a person to overwrite their
face info.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the name of the person whose face info
you want to overwrite, and then press the
[ ] button.
z If ve items of face info have already
been registered, a message will be
displayed. Choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
z If less than ve items of face info are
registered, go to step 4 to add face
information.
49
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Image Customization Features
Changing the Aspect Ratio
Still Images
Movies
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
30).
z Once the setting is complete, the screen
aspect ratio will be updated.
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen. Same aspect ratio as
35mm lm, used for printing images at 5 x 7-inch or postcard sizes.
Used for display on standard-denition televisions or similar display
devices. Also used for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or A-series
sizes.
Square aspect ratio.
● Not available in [ ] mode.
● You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (
=
31)
> [
1] tab > [Still Image Aspect Ratio].
Erasing Registered Information
You can erase information (face info, names, and birthdays) registered to
Face ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be
erased.
1
Access the [Erase Info] screen.
z Follow step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
45) and choose [Erase
Info].
2
Choose a person to erase their
information.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the name of the person to erase, and
then press the [ ] button.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
● If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to
display their name (
=
115), overwrite their info (
=
119), or
search for images that include them (
=
116).
● You can also erase names in image information (
=
119).
50
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Capturing in RAW Format
The camera can capture images in JPEG and RAW format.
JPEG
Images
Processed in the camera for optimal image quality and
compressed to reduce le size. However, the compression
process is irreversible, and images cannot be restored to
their original, unprocessed state. Image processing may
also cause some loss of image quality.
RAW
Images
“Raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially no
loss of image quality from the camera’s image processing.
The data cannot be used in this state for viewing on a
computer or printing. You must rst process it on this
camera (
=
132) or use the Digital Photo Professional
application (
=
189) to convert images to ordinary JPEG
or TIFF les. Images can be adjusted with minimal loss of
image quality during processing.
z Press the [
] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
30).
z To capture in RAW format only, choose
the [
] option.
z To capture images in both JPEG and
RAW format simultaneously, choose the
JPEG image quality, and then press the
[ ] button. A [ ] mark is displayed next
to [RAW]. To undo this setting, follow the
same steps and remove the [ ] mark
next to [RAW].
● When transferring RAW images (or RAW and JPEG images
recorded together) to a computer, always use the dedicated
software (
=
189).
● Digital zoom (
=
42) is not available when capturing images in
RAW format.
Changing Image Quality
Still Images
Movies
Choose from 7 combinations of size (number of pixels) and compression
(image quality). Also specify whether to capture images in RAW format
(
=
50).
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
30).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
● [ ] and [ ] indicate different levels of image quality depending
on the extent of compression. At the same size (number of
pixels), [
] offers higher image quality. Although [ ] images
have slightly lower image quality, more t on a memory card. Note
that [
]-size images are of [ ] quality.
● Not available in [
] mode.
● You can also change the image quality by accessing MENU
(
=
31) > [ 1] tab > [Image quality].
When deciding the number of pixels based on print size, use the following
table as a guide for images with a 3:2 aspect ratio.
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
A3 (11.7 x 16.5 in.)
A4 (8.3 x 11.7 in.)
3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard
51
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Changing Movie Image Quality
Still Images
Movies
Adjust movie image quality (image size and frame rate). The frame rate
indicates how many frames are recorded per second, which is determined
automatically based on the NTSC or PAL setting (
=
172).
z Press the [
] button, choose the movie
quality menu item, and then choose the
desired option (
=
30).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
For NTSC Video
Image
Quality
Number of
Recording Pixels
Frame Rate Details
1920 x 1080 59.94 fps
For shooting in full HD.
[
] enables movies
with smoother motion.
1920 x 1080 29.97 fps
1920 x 1080 23.98 fps
1280 x 720 29.97 fps For shooting in HD.
640 x 480 29.97 fps
For shooting in standard
denition.
● The le extension for JPEG images is .JPG, and the extension for
RAW images is .CR2.
● You can also congure this setting by accessing MENU (
=
31)
> [
1] tab > [Image quality].
Using the Menu
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Image quality] on the [ 1] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
31).
z To capture in RAW format at the same
time, turn the [
] dial and choose
[ ] under [RAW]. Note that only JPEG
images are captured when [−] is selected.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [JPEG], and then choose
the image size and quality. Note that only
RAW images are captured when [−] is
selected.
z When nished, press the [
] button to
return to the menu screen.
● [RAW] and [JPEG] cannot both be set to [−].
52
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Helpful Shooting Features
Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level
Still Images
Movies
An electronic level can be displayed as a guideline to ensure the camera
is level from front to back and left to right.
1
Display the electronic level.
z Press the [ ] button several times to
display the electronic level.
2
Straighten the camera.
z (1) indicates the front-back orientation
and (2) the left-right orientation.
z If the camera is tilted, move it so that the
red line changes to green.
● If the electronic level is not displayed in step 1, press the
[
] button and check the setting in [ 1] tab > [Shooting
information display] (
=
103).
● The electronic level is not displayed during movie recording.
● If you hold the camera vertically, the orientation of the electronic
level will be updated automatically to match the camera
orientation.
● Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you
level the camera (
=
172).
● Not available in [
] mode.
(
1
) (
2
)
For PAL Video
Image
Quality
Number of
Recording Pixels
Frame Rate Details
1920 x 1080 50.00 fps
For shooting in full HD.
1920 x 1080 25.00 fps
1280 x 720 25.00 fps For shooting in HD.
640 x 480 25.00 fps
For shooting in standard
denition.
● Black bars (displayed on the left and right in [ ] and
[
] modes and on the top and bottom in [ ],
[
], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and
[
] modes) indicate image areas not recorded.
● You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (
=
31)
> [
7] tab > [Movie rec. size].
53
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Deactivating Image Stabilization
Still Images
Movies
When the camera is held still (as when shooting from a tripod), you should
set image stabilization to [Off] to deactivate it.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [IS
Settings] on the [ 4] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
31).
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [IS Mode], press the
[ ] button, and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the
desired option (
=
31).
Continuous
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions
is automatically applied (Intelligent IS) (
=
41).
Off Deactivates image stabilization.
Deactivating Auto Level
Still Images
Movies
Auto leveling keeps movies straight. To cancel this feature, choose
[Disable].
z Press the [
] button, choose
[ Auto level] on the [ 4] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
31).
z Choose [Disable], and press the [ ]
button again (
=
31).
● Once recording begins, the display area narrows, and subjects
are enlarged (
=
54).
54
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Customizing Camera Operation
Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as
follows.
For instructions on menu functions, see “Menu Screen” (
=
31).
Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing
Still Images
Movies
The lamp lights up to help you focus when you press the shutter button
halfway in low-light conditions. This lamp can be deactivated.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[AF-assist beam ring] on the [ 3] tab,
and then choose [Disable].
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Enable].
Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same
Size Shown before Shooting
Still Images
Movies
Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for image straightening and correction
of signicant camera shake.
To record movies with subjects at the same size shown before shooting,
you can reduce image stabilization and cancel Auto level.
z Set [
Auto level] to [Disable] as
described in “Deactivating Auto Level”
(
=
53).
z Follow step 1 in “Deactivating Image
Stabilization” (
=
53) to access the [IS
Settings] screen.
z Choose [Dynamic IS], and then choose
[Low] (
=
31).
● You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded
at the same size shown before shooting.
● [Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [Off]
(
=
53).
● Only [Standard] is available when the movie quality is [
]
(NTSC) or [
] (PAL).
55
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from
Lighting Up
Still Images
Movies
A red-eye reduction lamp lights up to reduce red-eye when the ash is
used in low-light shots. This lamp can be deactivated.
1
Access the [Flash Control] screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then
choose [Off].
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots
Still Images
Movies
You can change how long images are displayed after shots.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Image review] on the [ 2] tab, and then
choose the desired option.
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [2 sec.].
2 sec.,
4 sec.,
8 sec.
Displays images for the specied time. Even while the
shot is displayed, you can take another shot by pressing
the shutter button halfway again.
Hold
Displays images until you press the shutter button
halfway.
Off
No image display after shots.
● By pressing the [ ] button while an image is displayed after
shooting, you can switch the display information.
56
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Specic Scenes
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will
automatically congure the settings for optimal shots.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
2
Choose a shooting mode.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
(
=
30).
3
Shoot.
● You can also choose a shooting mode by touching [ ] in the
upper left after you set the mode dial to [
].
Shooting Portraits (Portrait)
Still Images
Movies
z Take shots of people with a softening
effect.
Other Shooting Modes
Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and
take shots enhanced with unique image effects or
captured using special functions
57
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
● Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.
● In [
] and [ ] modes, shots may look grainy because the ISO
speed (
=
80) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.
● Because the camera will shoot continuously in [
] mode, hold it
steady while shooting.
● In [
] mode, excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions
may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.
● In [
] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (
=
53).
● When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [ ]
mode instead of [
] mode will give better results (
=
35).
● In [
] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press
the shutter button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.
● You can also choose the shooting mode by accessing MENU
(
=
31) > [ 1] tab > [Rec. Mode].
Shooting Evening Scenes without
Using a Tripod (Handheld Night
Scene)
Still Images
Movies
z Beautiful shots of evening scenes or
portraits with evening scenery in the
background, without the need to hold the
camera very still (as with a tripod).
z A single image is created by combining
consecutive shots, reducing camera
shake and image noise.
Shooting Underwater (Underwater)
Still Images
Movies
z Natural-colored shots of sea life and
underwater scenery, when you use an
optional waterproof case (
=
182).
z This mode can correct white balance and
match the effect of using a commercially
available color-compensating lter
(
=
58).
Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks)
Still Images
Movies
z Vivid shots of reworks.
58
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
● You can also congure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching the desired focus range, and then touching it again.
Correcting White Balance
Still Images
Movies
White balance can be manually corrected in [
] mode (
=
56). This
adjustment can match the effect of using a commercially available color-
compensating lter.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
56) and choose [ ].
2
Choose white balance.
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu.
3
Adjust the setting.
z Turn the [ ] dial to adjust the
correction level for B and A, and then
press the [ ] button.
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
● B represents blue and A, amber.
● White balance can also be manually corrected by recording
custom white balance data (
=
83) before following the
preceding steps.
Using Functions for Underwater Shots
Shooting with an Underwater Focus Range
Still Images
Movies
If focusing is difcult in [ ] mode (
=
56) with a focus range of [ ],
using a focus range designed for underwater shooting can ensure optimal
underwater shots.
1
Congure the setting.
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
56) and choose [ ].
z Press the [
] button, choose the desired
focus range (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button.
2
Shoot.
Focus Range Description
Underwater
Macro
Take close-ups of sea life, using the digital zoom for
even closer shots.
Quick
Avoid missing unexpected underwater shooting
opportunities when shooting subjects some distance
away. Especially effective for moving subjects.
Manual
focus
Focus on subjects manually (=
89).
Refer to “Lens” (
=
223) for details on the range of each focus range.
● In [ ] mode, optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle.
● In [ ] mode, use of digital zoom may cause images to appear
grainy at some recording pixel settings (
=
50).
● In [
] mode, subjects at close range may not be in focus. In
this case, try setting the focus range to [
].
59
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Item Details
Choose from [ ] or one of ve levels of background
defocusing.
Choose from ve levels of brightness.
Choose from ve levels of skin smoothing. Skin smoothing
is optimized for the main subject’s face.
To use touch shutter, choose [ ].
● Areas other than people’s skin may be modied, depending on
the shooting conditions.
● Try taking some test shots rst to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
● In [ ] ash mode, background defocusing is set to [ ] and
cannot be changed.
● In [
] mode, the time left before shooting is shown on the top of
the screen when you activate the self-timer by selecting [
], or
by selecting [
] and setting the time to 3 seconds or more.
Applying Special Effects
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.
Shooting Yourself under Optimal Settings
(Self Portrait)
For self-portraits, customizable image processing includes skin smoothing
as well as brightness and background adjustment to make yourself stand
out.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
56) and choose [ ].
2
Open the screen.
z Open the screen as shown.
3
Congure the setting.
z On the screen, touch the icon of the
setting to congure.
z Choose the desired option.
z To return to the previous screen, touch
[
].
4
Shoot.
(
2
)
(
1
)
60
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shooting Panoramas (Panoramic Shot)
Still Images
Movies
Create a panorama combining shots captured continuously as you move
the camera one direction while holding the shutter button all the way
down.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
56) and choose [ ].
2
Choose a shooting direction.
z Press the [ ] button and choose the
direction you will shoot.
z An arrow is displayed showing the
direction to move the camera.
3
Focus.
z Press the shutter button halfway to focus
on the subject, and continue holding the
button halfway down.
4
Shoot.
z Holding the shutter button all the way
down, move the camera at a constant
speed in the direction of the arrow.
z The area displayed clearly (1) is
captured.
z A shooting progress indicator is displayed
(2).
z Shooting stops when you release the
shutter button, or when the progress
indicator is completely blue.
(
1
)
(
2
)
Making Skin Look Smoother (Smooth Skin)
Still Images
Movies
You can enhance skin tone to make it look smoother.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
56) and choose [ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an effect level, and then
press the [
] button.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
● Areas other than people’s skin may be modied, depending on
the shooting conditions.
● Try taking some test shots rst to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
61
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Conveying a Sense of Speed by Blurring the
Background (Panning)
Still Images
Movies
By panning, you can blur the background to convey a sense of speed. The
camera will detect and correct subject blurring, so the subject will remain
relatively clear and sharp.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
56) and choose [ ].
2
Shoot.
z Before shooting, press the shutter button
halfway as you move the camera so that
it follows the subject.
z Keep the moving subject in the frame
displayed, and press the shutter button all
the way down.
z Even after you have pressed the shutter
button fully, continue moving the camera
to follow the subject.
● Try taking some test shots rst to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
● To adjust the effect level, turn the [ ] dial.
● You can move the frame by dragging it or touching the screen.
● For best results, hold the camera securely in both hands, with
your elbows close to your body, and rotate your whole body to
follow the subject.
● This feature is more effective for subjects moving horizontally,
such as cars or trains.
● In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images
may not look as expected.
● Shooting may stop midway if you move the camera too slowly or
quickly. However, the panorama created up to that point will still
be saved.
● Images created from shots in [
] mode are large. Use a
computer or other device to reduce panorama images if you will
print them by inserting a memory card in a Canon printer.
If panoramas are not compatible with certain software or Web
services, try resizing them on a computer.
● The following subjects and scenes may not be stitched correctly.
- Subjects that are moving
- Subjects that are nearby
- Scenes where the contrast varies greatly
- Scenes with long stretches of the same color or pattern, such
as the sea or sky
● You can also set the shooting direction by touching [ ].
62
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect
Still Images
Movies
This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus lter were
attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
56) and choose [ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect
level.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
● Try taking some test shots rst to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Shooting in Monochrome (Grainy B/W)
Still Images
Movies
Take monochrome pictures with a gritty, rough feeling.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
56) and choose [ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect
level.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
63
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shots Resembling Oil Paintings (Art Bold Effect)
Still Images
Movies
Make subjects look more substantial, like subjects in oil paintings.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
56) and choose [ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect
level.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect
(Fish-Eye Effect)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot with the distorting effect of a sh-eye lens.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
56) and choose [ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect
level.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
● Try taking some test shots rst to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
64
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect
(Toy Camera Effect)
Still Images
Movies
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera, with
vignetting (darker, blurred image corners) and modied color overall.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
56) and choose [ ].
2
Choose a color tone.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose a color
tone.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
Standard Shots resemble toy camera images.
Warm Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].
Cool Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].
● Try taking some test shots rst to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Shots Resembling Watercolors
(Water Painting Effect)
Still Images
Movies
Soften colors, for photos resembling watercolor paintings.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
56) and choose [ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect
level.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
65
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips)
Speed Playback Time
Approx. 12 sec.
Approx. 6 sec.
Approx. 3 sec.
Movies are played back at 30 fps.
● The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set
the zoom before shooting.
● Try taking some test shots rst to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
● To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the [ ][ ]
buttons in step 2. To return the frame to horizontal orientation,
press the [
][ ] buttons.
● To move the frame when it is in horizontal orientation, press the
[
][ ] buttons, and to move the frame when it is in vertical
orientation, press the [
][ ] buttons.
● Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the
frame.
● Movie image quality is [
] at an aspect ratio of [ ] and [ ] at
an aspect ratio of [
] (
=
49). These quality settings cannot
be changed.
● You can also move the frame by touching or dragging across the
screen.
Shots Resembling Miniature Models
(Miniature Effect)
Still Images
Movies
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above
and below your selected area.
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and
objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is
not recorded.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
56) and choose [ ].
z A white frame is displayed, indicating the
image area that will not be blurred.
2
Choose the area to keep in focus.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Move the zoom lever to resize the frame,
and turn the [
] dial to move it.
3
For movies, choose the movie
playback speed.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose the speed.
4
Return to the shooting screen and
shoot.
z Press the [ ] button to return to the
shooting screen, and then shoot.
66
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Adding Artistic Effects
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
56) and choose [ ].
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Natural Images are natural and organic.
Art Standard Images resemble paintings, with subdued contrast.
Art Vivid Images resemble vivid illustrations.
Art Bold Images resemble oil paintings, with bold edges.
Art Embossed
Images resemble old photos, with bold edges and
dark ambiance.
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes
(High Dynamic Range)
Still Images
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels
each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal
brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the washed-
out highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tend to occur in high-
contrast shots.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
56) and choose [ ].
2
Shoot.
z Hold the camera steady as you shoot.
When you press the shutter button all
the way down, the camera will take three
shots and combine them.
● Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
● Subjects are displayed larger than in other modes.
● If excessive camera shake interferes with shooting, mount
the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod
or other means to secure the camera (
=
53).
● Any subject movement will cause images to look blurry.
● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes and combines the images.
● [
] may be displayed when you press the shutter button halfway
in bright conditions, indicating automatic adjustment for optimal
image brightness.
67
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
● For easier viewing, try choosing MENU > [ 2] tab > [Night
Display] > [On] (
=
172) before shooting.
● To make stars brighter, choose MENU (
=
31) > [ 6] tab >
[Star Emphasis] > [Sharp]. To emphasize the bright stars in a
starry sky, set [Star Emphasis] to [Soft]. This setting can produce
eye-catching shots by enlarging bright stars while de-emphasizing
dimmer stars. To disable starlight processing, select [Off].
● Try switching to manual focus mode (
=
89) to more accurately
specify the focal position before shooting.
Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails)
Still Images
Movies
Streaks created by the movement of stars through the sky are recorded in
a single image. After determining the shutter speed and number of shots,
the camera shoots continuously. A shooting session can last up to about
two hours. Check the battery level in advance.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
56) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
2
Specify the duration of the shooting
session.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose the
shooting duration.
Special Modes for Other Purposes
Shooting Starry Skies (Star)
Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies (Star Nightscape)
Still Images
Movies
Capture impressive shots of starry skies above night scenes. Starlight in
the image is automatically enhanced, making starry skies look beautiful.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
56) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
2
Secure the camera.
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still and
prevent camera shake.
3
Shoot.
● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
68
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Recording Movies of Star Movement (Star Time-Lapse Movie)
Still Images
Movies
By recording a time-lapse movie that combines images shot at a specied
interval, you can create movies with fast-moving stars. You can adjust the
shooting interval and recording duration as needed.
Note that each session takes a long time, and requires many shots. Check
the battery level and memory card space in advance.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
56) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
2
Congure movie settings.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then choose
the desired option.
3
Secure the camera.
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
3
Secure the camera.
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
4
Shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way
down. [Busy] is displayed briey, and
then shooting begins.
z Do not disturb the camera while shooting.
z To cancel shooting, press the shutter
button all the way down again. Note that
cancellation may take up to about 30
seconds.
● If the camera runs out of battery power, shooting stops and a
composite image created from the images up to that point is
saved.
● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
● For easier viewing, try choosing MENU > [ 2] tab > [Night
Display] > [On] (
=
172) before shooting.
● Try switching to manual focus mode (
=
89) to more accurately
specify the focal position before shooting.
69
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Item Options Details
Save
Stills
Enable, Disable
You can choose to save each
shot collected before the movie
is created. Note that when
[Enable] is selected, [Effect] is
not available.
Effect
Choose movie effects, such as
star trails.
Shot Interval
15 sec., 30 sec.,
1 min.
Choose the interval between
each shot.
Frame Rate
, (NTSC)
, (PAL)
Choose the movie frame rate.
Shooting
Time
60 min., 90 min.,
Unlimited
Choose the length of the
recording session. To record
until the battery runs out,
choose [Unlimited].
Auto
exposure
Lock to 1st shot,
For each shot
Choose whether exposure is
determined by the rst shot or
adjusted for each shot.
Estimated playback time based on shooting interval and frame rate
(for a one-hour session)
Interval between Shots
Frame Rate
Playback Time
NTSC PAL
15 sec.
16 sec.
15 sec.
8 sec.
30 sec.
8 sec.
30 sec.
4 sec.
1 min.
4 sec.
1 min.
2 sec.
4
Check the brightness.
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot a single still image.
z Switch to Playback mode (
=
111) and
check image brightness.
z To adjust brightness, turn the exposure
compensation dial and change the
exposure level on the shooting screen.
Check brightness again by taking another
shot.
5
Shoot.
z Press the movie button. Recording
begins, and the indicator on the back of
the camera blinks.
z Do not disturb the camera while shooting.
z To cancel shooting, press the movie
button again. Note that cancellation may
take up to about 30 seconds.
z The camera operates in Eco mode
(
=
173) while shooting.
70
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Adjusting Colors
Still Images
Movies
Colors can be manually adjusted in [
] mode.
1
Choose a shooting mode.
z Choose [ ] (
=
67), [ ] (
=
67), or
[ ] (
=
68).
2
Choose color adjustment.
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
30).
3
Adjust the setting.
z Turn the [ ] dial or press the [ ][ ]
buttons to adjust the correction level for B
and A, and then press the [ ] button.
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
● B represents blue and A, amber.
● Advanced settings can be accessed by pressing the [
]
button when the screen in step 2 is displayed (
=
84).
● You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging
the bar in step 2.
● There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
● If the camera runs out of battery power or memory card space,
shooting stops and a movie created from the images up to that
point is saved.
● A shooting interval of [1 min.] is not available with these effects:
[
], [ ], [ ], or [ ].
● Sound is not recorded.
● For easier viewing, try choosing MENU > [
2] tab > [Night
Display] > [On] (
=
172) before shooting.
● You can also access the screen in step 2 by choosing MENU
(
=
31) > [ 6] tab > [Star Time-Lapse Movie Setting].
● Images saved with [Save
Stills] set to [Enable] are managed
as a single group, and during playback, only the rst image is
displayed. To indicate that the image is part of a group, [
]
is displayed in the upper left of the screen. If you erase a grouped
image (
=
123), all images in the group are also erased. Be
careful when erasing images.
● Grouped images can be played back individually (
=
118) and
ungrouped (
=
118).
● Protecting (
=
121) a grouped image will protect all images in
the group.
● Grouped images can be viewed individually when played
back using Image Search (
=
116). In this case, images are
temporarily ungrouped.
● The following actions are not available for grouped images:
magnifying (
=
120), tagging as favorites (
=
126), editing
(
=
128), printing (
=
191), setting up individual image printing
(
=
195), or adding to a photobook (
=
197). To do these
things, either view grouped images individually (
=
118) or
cancel grouping (
=
118) rst.
● Try switching to manual focus mode (
=
89) to more accurately
specify the focal position before shooting.
71
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
● The focus may not be adjusted under the following conditions. In
this case, try again from step 3.
- There is a bright light source
- Airplanes or other light sources or clouds crossed the sky
● If adjustment fails, focus returns to the original position.
Adjusting the Focus
Still Images
Movies
Automatically adjust the focus to suit starry skies.
1
Choose a shooting mode.
z Choose [ ] (
=
67), [ ] (
=
67), or
[ ] (
=
68).
2
Secure the camera.
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
3
Frame the stars to capture.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Tilt the camera so that the stars to
capture are inside the frame displayed.
4
Adjust the focus.
z Press the [ ] button. [Adjusting star
focus] is displayed, and adjustment
begins.
z Adjustment may take about 15
seconds. Do not move the camera until
[Adjustment completed] is displayed.
z Press the [
] button.
5
Shoot (=
67, =
67, =
68).
72
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Locking or Changing Image Brightness
Still Images
Movies
You can lock the exposure before or during recording or adjust it in
1/3-stop increments within a range of −3 to +3 stops.
1
Lock the exposure.
z Touch [ ] to lock the exposure.
z To unlock the exposure, touch [ ] again.
2
Adjust the exposure.
z Turn the exposure compensation dial.
3
Shoot (=
72).
Recording Various Movies
Recording Movies in [ ] Mode
Still Images
Movies
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
30).
z Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
2
Congure the settings to suit the
movie (=
207).
3
Shoot.
z Press the movie button.
z To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
● You can also choose the shooting mode by accessing MENU
(
=
31) > [ 1] tab > [Rec. Mode].
● Focus can be adjusted during recording by touching [ ] and
pressing the [
][ ] buttons while [ ] is displayed.
73
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Correcting Severe Camera Shake
Still Images
Movies
Counteract severe camera shake, such as when recording while moving.
The portion of images displayed changes, and subjects are enlarged more
than for [Standard].
z Follow the steps in “Recording Movies
with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Shooting” (
=
54) to choose
[High].
● [Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [Off].
● Only [Standard] is available when the movie quality is [
]
(NTSC) or [
] (PAL).
Disabling Auto Slow Shutter
Still Images
Movies
Auto slow shutter can be disabled if movement in movies is rough.
However, under low light, movies may look dark.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[ Auto slow shutter] on the [ 8]
tab, and then choose [A-SLOW OFF]
(
=
31).
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [A-SLOW ON].
● Auto slow shutter is only available for [ ] and [ ]
movies.
74
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Recording Short Clips
Still Images
Movies
Apply playback effects to brief clips of a few seconds, such as fast motion,
slow motion, or replay. Clips recorded in this mode may be included in
Story Highlights albums (
=
136).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
30).
z Black bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
2
Specify the shooting time and
playback effect.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Turn the [ ] dial to set the shooting time
(4 – 6 sec.), and turn the [ ] dial to set
the playback effect (
=
74).
3
Shoot (=
72).
z A bar showing the elapsed time is
displayed.
Playback Effects
2x
Playback in fast motion
1x
Playback at normal speed
1/2x
Playback in slow motion
Normal playback with the last two seconds rewound and
played again in slow motion
Sound Settings
Still Images
Movies
Deactivating the Wind Filter
Noise caused by strong wind can be reduced. However, the recording
may sound unnatural when this option is used when there is no wind. In
this case, you can deactivate the wind lter.
z Press the [
] button, choose [Wind
Filter] on the [ 8] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
31).
z Choose [Off] (
=
31).
Using the Attenuator
Set to [Auto] to reduce audio distortion by automatically activating and
deactivating the attenuator to suit shooting conditions. The attenuator can
also be set to [On] or [Off] manually.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Attenuator] on the [ 8] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
31).
z Choose an option as desired (
=
31).
75
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Recording Time-Lapse Movies
(Time-Lapse Movie)
Still Images
Movies
Time-lapse movies combine images that are shot automatically at a
specied interval. Any gradual changes of the subject (such as changes in
a landscape) are played back in fast motion. You can adjust the shooting
interval and number of shots.
1
Choose [ ].
z Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
30).
z Black bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
2
Congure movie settings.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose an item. Choose
the desired option, and then press the
[ ] button.
3
Secure the camera.
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
4
Shoot.
z To start shooting, press the movie button.
z Do not disturb the camera while shooting.
z To cancel shooting, press the movie
button again.
z The camera operates in Eco mode
(
=
173) while shooting.
● Sound is not recorded in these clips.
● The movie quality is [
] (for NTSC) or [ ] (for PAL)
(
=
51,
=
52) and cannot be changed.
● During [
] recording, a mark indicating the last two seconds is
added to the bar showing the elapsed time.
76
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Item Details
Shooting scene Choose from three types of scenes.
Interval/ Shots
Choose the shooting interval (in seconds) and total
number of shots.
Exposure
Choose whether exposure is determined by the rst
shot or adjusted for each shot.
Review image Display the previous shot for up to 2 seconds.
Time required
Length of the recording session. Varies depending
on the shooting interval and number of shots.
- Scene 1: Up to 1 hour
- Scene 2 or 3: Up to 2 hours
Playback time
Playback time of the movie created from captured
still images.
● Fast-moving subjects may look distorted in movies.
● Sound is not recorded.
● Focus remains constant during shooting, after it is determined for
the rst shot.
● The movie quality is [
] and cannot be changed.
● The time-lapse movie frame rate is automatically set to [
]
for NTSC or [
] for PAL and cannot be changed (
=
172).
● You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (
=
31)
> [
7] tab > [Time-lapse movie settings].
77
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting
style.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
2
Customize the settings as desired
(=
78 – =
98), and then shoot.
● If the optimum exposure cannot be obtained when you press the
shutter button halfway, the shutter speed and aperture value are
displayed in orange. In this case, try adjusting the ISO speed
(
=
80) or activating the ash (if subjects are dark,
=
96),
which may enable optimum exposure.
● Movies can be recorded in [
] mode as well, by pressing the
movie button. However, some
menu (
=
30) and MENU
(
=
31) settings may be automatically adjusted for movie
recording.
P Mode
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting
style
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode
dial set to [
] mode.
● [
]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure
● Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes
other than [
], make sure the function is available in that mode
(
=
207).
78
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock)
Still Images
Movies
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and
exposure separately.
1
Lock the exposure.
z Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked, and then press
the [ ] button.
z [ ] is displayed, and the exposure is
locked.
z To unlock AE, press the [
] button again.
[ ] is no longer displayed.
2
Compose the shot and shoot.
● AE: Auto Exposure
● After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination
of shutter speed and aperture value by turning the [
] dial
(Program Shift).
Image Brightness (Exposure)
Adjusting Image Brightness
(Exposure Compensation)
Still Images
Movies
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of -3 to +3.
z As you watch the screen, turn the
exposure compensation dial to adjust
brightness.
Deactivating Exposure Simulation
Images are displayed at a brightness simulating the actual brightness as
captured. For this reason, screen brightness is also adjusted in response
to changes in exposure compensation. This feature can be disabled to
keep the screen at a brightness convenient for shooting, unaffected by
exposure compensation.
z Press the [
] button, choose [Expo.
simulation] on the [ 1] tab, and then
choose [Disable] (
=
31).
79
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame
Still Images
Movies
1
Set the metering method to [ ].
z Follow the steps in “Changing the
Metering Method” (
=
79) to choose
[ ].
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Spot
AE Point] on the [ 6] tab, and then
choose [AF Point] (
=
31).
z The Spot AE Point frame will now be
linked to the movement of the AF frame
(
=
91).
● Not available when [AF method] is set to [ +Tracking] (
=
92).
Changing the Metering Method
Still Images
Movies
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
conditions as follows.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
30).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
Evaluative
metering
For typical shooting conditions, including backlit
shots. Automatically adjusts exposure to match
the shooting conditions.
Spot metering
Metering restricted to within the [
] (Spot AE
Point frame). You can also link the Spot AE Point
frame to the AF frame (=
79).
Center-weighted
average
Determines the average brightness of light
across the entire image area, calculated by
treating brightness in the central area as more
important.
80
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings
Still Images
Movies
When the camera is set to [AUTO], maximum ISO speed can be specied
in a range of [400] – [25600], and sensitivity can be specied in a range of
three levels.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ISO
speed] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
31).
z Choose [ISO Auto Settings] and press the
[ ] button.
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose a menu item to congure, and
then choose the desired option (
=
31).
Changing the Noise Reduction Level
(High ISO speed NR)
You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Standard], [High], [Low].
This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds.
z Press the [
] button, choose [High
ISO speed NR] on the [ 6] tab, and
then choose the desired option (
=
31).
Changing the ISO Speed
Still Images
Movies
Set the ISO speed to [AUTO] for automatic adjustment to suit the shooting
mode and conditions. Otherwise, set a higher ISO speed for higher
sensitivity, or a lower value for lower sensitivity.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
30).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
● To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have
set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway.
● Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image
graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera
shake in some shooting conditions.
● The faster shutter speed used at higher ISO speeds reduces
subject and camera shake and increases the ash range.
However, shots may look grainy.
● You can also set the ISO speed by accessing MENU (
=
31) >
[
5] tab > [ISO speed] > [ISO Speed].
81
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Adjusting Auto ND Filter Settings
For optimal brightness in the scenes you shoot, Auto ND lter reduces
light intensity to 1/8 the actual level, by an amount equivalent to three
stops. Choosing [ ] enables you to reduce the shutter speed and
aperture value.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
30).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
● When selecting [ ], mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (
=
53).
● ND: Neutral Density
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)
Still Images
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured at different exposure levels
(standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each
time you shoot. You can adjust the amount of underexposure and
overexposure (relative to standard exposure) from –2 to +2 stops in
1/3-stop increments.
1
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Bracketing] on the [ 5] tab, and then
choose [ ] (
=
31).
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, and then adjust
the setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons
or turning the [ ] dial.
● AEB shooting is only available in [ ] mode (
=
96).
● Continuous shooting (
=
44) is not available in this mode.
● If exposure compensation is already in use (
=
78), the value
specied for that function is treated as the standard exposure
level for this function.
● You can also access the setting screen of step 2 by pressing
the [
] button when the exposure compensation screen
(
=
78) is displayed.
● Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specied in [
]
(
=
43).
82
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shooting Bright Subjects (Highlight Tone Priority)
Still Images
Movies
Improve gradation in bright image areas to avoid loss of detail in subject
highlights.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Highlight tone priority] on the [ 5] tab,
and then choose [D+] (
=
31).
● With [D+], ISO speeds lower than [160] are not available. Auto
Lighting Optimizer is also disabled, in this case.
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast
(Auto Lighting Optimizer)
Still Images
Movies
Correct brightness and contrast automatically to avoid images that are too
dark or lack contrast.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
30).
● This feature may increase noise under some shooting conditions.
● When the effect of Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and
images become too bright, set it to [Low] or [Disable].
● Images may still be bright or the effect of exposure compensation
may be weak under a setting other than [Disable] if you use a
darker setting for exposure compensation or ash exposure
compensation. For shots at your specied brightness, set this
feature to [Disable].
● You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (
=
31)
> [
5] tab > [Auto Lighting Optimizer].
● To keep the Auto Lighting Optimizer disabled in [
] and [ ]
modes, press the [
] button on the Auto Lighting Optimizer
setting screen to add a [
] mark to [Disable during man expo].
83
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Custom White Balance
Still Images
Movies
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.
1
Shoot a white object.
z Aim the camera at a sheet of paper or
other plain white subject, so that white
lls the screen.
z Focus manually and shoot (
=
89).
2
Choose [Custom WB].
z Choose [Custom WB] on the [ 6] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z The custom white balance selection
screen will appear.
3
Load the white data.
z Select your image from step 1, and then
press [ ].
z On the conrmation screen, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [OK], press
the [ ] button, and then press the [ ]
button again.
z Press the [ ] button to close the
menu.
4
Choose [ ].
z Follow the steps in “Capturing Natural
Colors (White Balance)” (
=
83) to
choose [ ].
Image Colors
Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance)
Still Images
Movies
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
natural for the scene you are shooting.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
30).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
Auto
Automatically sets the optimal white balance for
the shooting conditions.
Daylight For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
Shade For shooting in the shade.
Cloudy For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight.
Tungsten light
For shooting under ordinary incandescent
lighting.
White
uorescent light
For shooting under white uorescent lighting.
Flash For shooting with the ash.
Underwater For shooting underwater.
Custom
For manually setting a custom white balance
(=
83).
Color temp.
For manually setting a white balance color
temperature (=
85).
84
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
2
Congure advanced settings.
z To congure more advanced settings,
press the [ ] button and adjust
the correction level by turning the
[ ][ ] dials or pressing the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
z To reset the correction level, press the
[ ] button.
z Press the [ ] button to complete the
setting.
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
● The camera will retain white balance correction levels even if
you switch to another white balance option (by following steps
in “Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance)” (
=
83)), but
correction levels will be reset if you record custom white balance
data.
● B: blue; A: amber; M: magenta; G: green
● You can customize camera operation so that the B and A
adjustment screen is accessed simply by turning the [
] or
[
] dial (
=
105).
● One level of blue/amber correction is equivalent to about 5
mireds on a color temperature conversion lter. (Mired: Color
temperature unit representing color temperature conversion lter
density)
● You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (
=
31)
> [
6] tab > [WB correction].
● You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging
the bar in step 1 or the frame in step 2.
● Shots in step 1 that are too bright or dark may prevent you from
setting the white balance correctly.
● A message is displayed if you specify an image in step 3 that is
not suitable for loading white data. Choose [Cancel] to choose a
different image. Choose [OK] to use that image for loading white
data, but note that it may not produce a suitable white balance.
● If [Unselectable image.] is displayed in step 3, choose [OK] to
clear the message and specify another image.
● If [Set WB to “
”] is displayed in step 3, press the [ ] button to
return to the menu screen, and then choose [
].
● Instead of a white object, a gray chart or 18% gray reector
(commercially available) can produce a more accurate white
balance.
● The current white balance and related settings are disregarded
when you shoot in step 1.
Manually Correcting White Balance
Still Images
Movies
You can correct white balance. This adjustment can match the effect of
using a commercially available color temperature conversion lter or color-
compensating lter.
1
Congure the setting.
z Follow the steps in “Capturing Natural
Colors (White Balance)” (
=
83) to
choose [ ].
z Turn the [
] dial to adjust the
correction level for B and A.
85
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Customizing Colors (Picture Style)
Still Images
Movies
Choose a Picture Style with color settings that express moods or
subjects well. Eight Picture Styles are available, and each can be further
customized.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
30).
Auto
The color tone is adjusted automatically to suit the
scene. The colors look vivid, especially for blue
skies, greenery, and sunsets in nature, outdoor,
and sunset scenes.
Standard
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. Suitable
for most scenes.
Portrait
For smooth skin tones, with slightly less
sharpness. Suited for close-up portraits. To modify
skin tones, adjust [Color tone] (
=
86).
Landscape
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and
crisp images. Effective for impressive landscapes.
Fine Detail
For detailed rendering of ne subject contours
and subtle textures. Makes images slightly more
vivid.
Neutral
For retouching later on a computer. Makes
images subdued, with lower contrast and natural
color tones.
Faithful
For retouching later on a computer. Faithfully
reproduces the actual colors of subjects as
measured in daylight with a color temperature
of 5200K. Makes images subdued, with lower
contrast.
Manually Setting White Balance Color Temperature
Still Images
Movies
A value can be set representing the white balance color temperature.
z Follow the steps in “Capturing Natural
Colors (White Balance)” (
=
83) to
choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, and then adjust
the setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons
or turning the [ ] dial.
● Color temperature can be set at 100 K increments in a range of
2,500 – 10,000 K.
86
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Color tone*
1
Adjust skin color tone. Choose lower
values to produce redder hues, or higher
values to produce yellower hues.
Filter effect*
2
Emphasize white clouds, the green of
trees, or other colors in monochrome
images.
N: Normal black-and-white image with
no lter effects.
Ye: The blue sky will look more natural,
and the white clouds will look
crisper.
Or: The blue sky will look slightly darker.
The sunset will look more brilliant.
R: The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall
leaves will look crisper and brighter.
G: Skin tones and lips will appear
muted. Green tree leaves will look
crisper and brighter.
Toning effect*
2
Choose from the following monochrome
hues: [N:None], [S:Sepia], [B:Blue],
[P:Purple], or [G:Green].
*1 Not available with [
].
*2 Only available with [
].
● In [Sharpness], [Fineness] and [Threshold] settings are not
applied to movies.
Monochrome Creates black and white images.
User Def.
Add a new style based on presets such as
[Portrait] or [Landscape] or a Picture Style le,
and then adjust it as needed (
=
85).
● Default [Auto] settings are used for [ ], [ ], and [ ]
until you add a Picture Style.
● You can also congure this setting by accessing MENU (
=
31)
> [
6] tab > [Picture Style].
Customizing Picture Styles
Customize these Picture Style settings as needed.
Sharpness
Strength
Adjust the level of edge enhancement.
Choose lower values to soften (blur)
subjects, or higher values to sharpen
them.
Fineness
Indicates the edge thinness that
enhancement applies to. Choose lower
values for more enhanced details.
Threshold
Contrast threshold between edges
and surrounding image areas, which
determines edge enhancement. Choose
lower values to enhance edges that do
not stand out much from surrounding
areas. Note that with lower values, noise
may also be emphasized.
Contrast
Adjust the contrast. Choose lower values
to decrease the contrast, or higher
values to increase it.
Saturation*
1
Adjust the intensity of colors. Choose
lower values to make colors faded, or
higher values to make them deeper.
87
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
2
Select a style to modify.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose the Picture Style that
serves as the basis.
3
Customize the style.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item to modify, and then customize it,
either by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or
turning the [ ] dial.
z When nished, press the [ ] button.
● Using the CameraWindow application (
=
189), you can also add
Picture Styles saved on a computer to the camera. For instructions,
refer to the CameraWindow Help.
● You can also choose a Picture Style to modify by touching [ ]
in step 2.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Choose a Picture Style as described
in “Customizing Colors (Picture Style)”
(
=
85).
z Press the [
] button.
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
an item, and then choose an option by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the
[ ] dial.
z To undo any changes, press the [ ]
button.
z When nished, press the [
] button.
● [Filter effect] results are more noticeable with higher [Contrast]
values.
Saving Customized Picture Styles
Save presets (such as [ ] or [ ]) that you have customized as new
styles. You can create several Picture Styles with different settings for
parameters such as sharpness or contrast.
1
Select a user-dened style number.
z Choose [ ], [ ], or [ ] as
described in “Customizing Colors (Picture
Style)” (
=
85).
z Press the [ ] button.
88
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)
Still Images
Movies
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [ ]. For
details on the range of focus, see “Lens” (
=
223).
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
● If the ash res, vignetting may occur.
● To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod
and shooting with the camera set to [
] (
=
43).
● You can also congure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching [
], and then touching it again.
Shooting Range and Focusing
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot at common focal lengths in a range of 24 – 72 mm (35mm lm
equivalent).
1
Assign [ ] to the [ ] ring (=
105).
2
Choose a focal length.
z To change the focal length from
24 to 28 mm, turn the [ ] ring
counterclockwise. Turn the [ ] ring
counterclockwise to zoom in or clockwise
to zoom out.
● Step zoom is not available when recording movies even if you
turn the [
] ring.
● When you are using digital zoom (
=
42), you cannot adjust the
zoom factor by turning the [
] ring counterclockwise. However,
you can set the focal length to 72 mm by turning it clockwise.
89
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
3
Fine-tune the focus.
z Press the shutter button halfway or touch
[ ] to have the camera ne-tune the
focal position (Safety MF).
z To cancel manual focus, choose [
] in
step 1.
● When you focus manually, the AF method (
=
91) is [1-point
AF] and cannot be changed.
● Focusing is possible when using the digital zoom (
=
42) or
digital tele-converter (
=
91), or when using a TV as a display
(
=
183), but the magnied display will not appear.
● To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to
stabilize it.
● You can enlarge or hide the magnied display area by adjusting
MENU (
=
31) > [ 4] tab > [MF-Point Zoom] settings.
● To deactivate automatic focus ne-tuning when the shutter button
is pressed halfway, choose MENU (
=
31) > [ 4] tab >
[Safety MF] > [Off].
● You can move the focusing frame by dragging on the screen in
step 2.
● You can lock the focus during movie recording by touching [
].
[
] is then displayed.
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
Still Images
Movies
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can
specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button
halfway to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near
the position you specied. For details on the range of focus, see “Lens”
(
=
223).
1
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
z [ ] and the MF indicator are displayed.
2
Specify the general focal position.
z Referring to the on-screen MF indicator
(1, which shows the distance and focal
position) and the magnied display, press
the [ ][ ] buttons to specify the general
focal position, and then press the [ ]
button.
z To adjust the magnication, press the [
]
button.
z During magnied display, you can move
the focusing frame by pressing the [ ]
button and then the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
(
1
)
90
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, and then adjust
the setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons
or turning the [ ] dial.
● Focus bracketing is only available in [ ] mode (
=
96).
● Continuous shooting (
=
44) is not available in this mode.
● You can also access the setting screen in step 2 by pressing the
[
] button in step 2 of “Shooting in Manual Focus Mode”
(
=
89).
● Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specied in [
]
(
=
43).
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)
Still Images
Movies
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing
easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge
detection as needed.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [MF
Peaking Settings] on the [ 4] tab,
choose [Peaking], and then choose [On]
(
=
31).
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose a menu item to congure, and
then choose the desired option (
=
31).
● Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured each time you shoot, with the
rst one at the focal distance you set manually and the others at farther
and nearer focal positions determined by presets. The distance from your
specied focus can be set in three levels.
1
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Bracketing] on the [
5] tab, and then
choose [ ] (
=
31).
91
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
1-point AF
Still Images
Movies
The camera focuses using a single AF frame. Effective for reliable
focusing. You can also move the frame by touching the screen (
=
95).
● A yellow frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot focus
when you press the shutter button halfway.
● To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or
in a corner, rst aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF
frame, and then hold the shutter button halfway down. As you
continue to hold the shutter button halfway, recompose the shot
as desired, and then press the shutter button all the way down
(Focus Lock).
● To return the AF frame to the original position in the center, keep
the [
] button held down.
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (1-point AF)
Still Images
Movies
When you want to change the position or size of the AF frame, set the AF
method to [1-point AF].
1
Move the AF frame.
z Pressing the [ ] button displays the AF
frame in orange.
z Turn the [ ] or [ ] dial to move the
AF frame, and press the [
][ ][ ][ ]
buttons to ne-tune the position.
z To return the AF frame to the original
position in the center, press the [
]
button.
Digital Tele-Converter
Still Images
Movies
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.6x or
2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster
than it would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the
same zoom factor.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Digital Zoom] on the [ 3] tab, and then
choose the desired option (
=
31).
z The view is enlarged and the zoom factor
is displayed on the screen.
● The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom
lever all the way toward [
] for maximum telephoto, and when
you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following step
2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)” (
=
42).
Choosing the AF Method
Still Images
Movies
Change the auto focus (AF) mode to suit shooting conditions.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
31).
● You can also congure this setting by accessing MENU (
=
31)
> [
3] tab > [AF method].
92
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Examples of faces that cannot be detected:
- Subjects that are distant or extremely close
- Subjects that are dark or light
- Faces in prole, at an angle, or partly hidden
● The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.
● Focusing is not possible on faces detected at the edge of the
screen (which are displayed with gray frames), even when you
press the shutter button halfway.
Smooth Zone AF
● The camera focuses within your designated area. Effective when the
subject is hard to capture with [ +Tracking] or [1-point AF], because
you can specify where to focus. The camera will focus within the white
frame displayed. You can move the white frame by dragging it or
touching the screen.
● When you press the shutter button halfway, green frames are
displayed around positions in focus within the white frame.
● A yellow frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot focus
when you press the shutter button halfway.
● Blue frames are displayed around positions in focus when you
select MENU (
=
31) > [ 3] tab > [AF operation] > [Servo AF].
2
Resize the AF frame.
z To reduce the AF frame size, turn the
[ ] ring. Turn it again to restore it to the
original size.
3
Finish the setup process.
z Press the [ ] button.
● AF frames are displayed at normal size when you use the digital
zoom (
=
42) or digital tele-converter (
=
91).
● You can also return the AF frame to the original position in the
center by holding down the [
] button.
● You can link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame (
=
79).
● You can also congure the AF frame size by pressing the
[
] button and choosing [AF Frame Size] on the [ 3] tab
(
=
31).
+Tracking
Still Images
Movies
● After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed
around the face of the main subject as determined by the camera. You
can also choose subjects yourself (
=
95).
● When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving
subjects, within a certain range.
● Frames turn green after you press the shutter button halfway and the
camera focuses.
● When no faces are detected, pressing the shutter button halfway
displays green frames around other areas in focus.
93
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Exposure is not locked in Servo AF mode when you press the
shutter button halfway but is determined the moment you shoot,
regardless of the metering mode (
=
79) setting.
● Continuous shooting (
=
44) with auto focus is possible by
specifying Servo AF. Note that continuous shooting is slower at
this time.
● Depending on the distance to the subject and the subject’s speed,
the camera may not be able to achieve correct focus.
● You can also congure this setting by accessing MENU (
=
31)
> [
3] tab > [AF operation].
Changing the Focus Setting
Still Images
Movies
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on
subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed.
Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the
shutter button halfway.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Continuous AF] on the [ 3] tab, and
then choose [Disable] (
=
31).
Enable
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because
the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press
the shutter button halfway.
Disable
Conserves battery power, because the camera does not
focus constantly.
● Choosing MENU (
=
31) > [ 3] tab > [AF Frame Size] >
[Small] will restrict the mode to [Disable].
Shooting with Servo AF
Still Images
Movies
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long
as you press the shutter button halfway.
1
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ONE
SHOT] in the menu, and then choose
[SERVO] (
=
30).
2
Focus.
z The focus and exposure are maintained
where the blue AF frame is displayed
while you are pressing the shutter button
halfway.
● The camera may not be able to shoot while focusing, even if you
press the shutter button all the way down. Keep holding down the
shutter button as you follow the subject.
● A yellow frame is displayed with [
] if the camera cannot focus
when you press the shutter button halfway.
● Using the self-timer (
=
42) will restrict the AF mode to [ONE
SHOT].
● Choosing MENU (
=
31) > [ 3] tab > [AF Frame Size] >
[Small] will restrict the mode to [ONE SHOT].
94
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)
Still Images
Movies
You can shoot after choosing a specic person’s face to focus on.
1
Set the AF method to [ +Tracking]
(=
91).
2
Enter Face Select mode.
z Aim the camera at the person’s face and
press the [ ] button.
z After [Face Select : On] is displayed, a
face frame [ ] is displayed around the
face detected as the main subject.
z Even if the subject moves, the face frame
[ ] follows the subject within a certain
range.
z If a face is not detected, [
] is not
displayed.
3
Choose the face to focus on.
z To switch the face frame [ ] to another
detected face, press the [ ] button.
z Once you cycle through all detected
faces, [Face Select : Off] is displayed,
followed by the selected AF method
screen.
4
Shoot.
z Press the shutter button halfway. After the
camera focuses, [ ] changes to [ ].
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
Fine-Tuning the Focus
Still Images
Movies
You can ne-tune the focus after autofocusing by turning the continuous
ring.
1
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[AF+MF] on the [ 3] tab, and then
choose [On] (
=
31).
2
Focus.
z Press the shutter button halfway to focus
on the subject, and continue holding the
button halfway down.
3
Fine-tune the focus.
z Turn the [ ] ring. Referring to the
on-screen MF indicator (which shows
the distance and focal position) and the
magnied display, turn the [ ] ring to
adjust the focus.
z To enlarge or reduce the magnied
display, press the [ ] button.
z To cancel focusing, release the shutter
button.
4
Shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
● Cannot be used with Servo AF (
=
93).
95
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● If you prefer not to shoot when you touch the screen, choose
[
] > [ 2] tab > [Touch Shutter] > [Touch Shutter] >
[Disable] (
=
31).
● Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or
move too rapidly, or when there is inadequate contrast between
subjects and the background.
● Even if you are shooting in [
] mode (
=
88), the camera will
revert to [
] mode if you touch the screen to specify where to
focus.
● To keep the frame in the same position (where you touched)
after shooting when [Touch Shutter] is set to [Enable] (
=
44),
choose MENU (
=
31) > [ 2] tab > [Touch Shutter] > [AF
frame pos’n] > [Touch point].
Shooting with AF Lock
Still Images
Movies
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will
not change even when you release your nger from the shutter button.
1
Lock the focus.
z With the shutter button pressed halfway,
press the [ ] button.
z The focus is now locked, and [ ] and the
MF indicator are displayed.
z To unlock the focus, hold the shutter
button halfway down and press the [
]
button again.
2
Compose the shot and shoot.
● Cannot be used with Touch Shutter (
=
44).
● When [Face ID] is set to [On], only the name of the registered
person chosen as the main subject is displayed, even if other
registered people have been detected. However, their names will
be recorded in the still images (
=
45).
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF)
Still Images
Movies
You can shoot after choosing a person’s face or another subject to focus
on.
1
Set the AF method to [ +Tracking]
(=
91).
2
Choose a person’s face or another
subject to focus on.
z Touch the subject or person on the
screen.
z When the subject is detected, the camera
beeps and [
] is displayed. Focus is
maintained even if the subject moves.
z To cancel Touch AF, touch [
].
3
Shoot.
z Press the shutter button halfway. After
the camera focuses, [ ] changes to a
green [
].
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
96
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Flash
Changing the Flash Mode
Still Images
Movies
You can change the ash mode to match the shooting scene. For details
on the ash range, see “Flash” (
=
223).
1
Lift the ash.
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose a ash
mode (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
● The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the [ ] button
when the ash is lowered. Lift the ash in advance.
● If the ash res, vignetting may occur.
Auto
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.
On
Fires for each shot.
Slow Synchro
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a
slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of ash range.
● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (
=
53).
● In [
] mode, even after the ash res, ensure that the main
subject does not move until the shutter sound is nished playing.
Off
For shooting without the ash.
● If a blinking [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions,
mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it
still.
● You can also congure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching the desired option, and then touching it again.
97
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
Still Images
Movies
Just as with regular exposure compensation (
=
78), you can adjust the
ash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.
z Raise the ash, press the [
] button and
immediately turn the [ ] dial to choose
the compensation level, and then press
the [ ] button.
z The correction level you specied is now
displayed.
● When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically
adjusts the shutter speed or aperture value for ash shots to
reduce washed-out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure.
However, you can deactivate automatic adjustment of the shutter
speed and aperture value by accessing MENU (
=
31) and
choosing [
5] tab > [Flash Control] > [Safety FE] > [Off].
● You can also congure the ash exposure compensation by
accessing MENU (
=
31) and choosing [ 5] tab > [Flash
Control] > [Flash Exp. Comp].
● You can also access the [Built-in Flash Settings] screen (
=
31)
as follows (except when an optional external ash is mounted).
- Press and hold the [
] button for at least one second.
- When the ash is up, press the [
] button and immediately
press the [
] button.
Shooting with FE Lock
Still Images
Movies
Just as with the AE lock (
=
78), you can lock the exposure for ash
shots.
1
Raise the ash and set it to [ ]
(=
96).
2
Lock the ash exposure.
z Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked, and then press
the [ ] button.
z The ash res, and when
[ ] is displayed, the ash output level is
retained.
z To unlock FE, press the [ ] button again.
[ ] is no longer displayed.
3
Compose the shot and shoot.
● FE: Flash Exposure
98
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Changing the Flash Timing
Still Images
Movies
Change the timing of the ash and shutter release as follows.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
31).
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose [Shutter Sync.], and then choose
the desired option (
=
31).
1st-curtain The ash res immediately after the shutter opens.
2nd-curtain The ash res immediately before the shutter closes.
Other Settings
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Still Images
Movies
You can keep image stabilization off until the moment you shoot.
z Follow the steps in “Deactivating Image
Stabilization” (
=
53) to choose [Shoot
Only].
99
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, see “Shutter” (
=
223).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the shutter speed.
z Turn the [ ] dial to set the shutter
speed.
● In conditions requiring slower shutter speeds, there may be a
delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
images to reduce noise.
● When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set
[IS Mode] to [Off] (
=
53).
● The speed you set may be lowered automatically as needed if the
ash res.
● Orange display of the aperture value when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been
obtained. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (
=
100).
● [ ]: Time value
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and
customize the camera for your shooting style
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the
respective mode.
100
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values ([M] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed
and aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.
For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values, see “Shutter”
(
=
223) and “Aperture” (
=
223).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
2
Congure the setting.
z Turn the [ ] dial to set the shutter
speed (1).
z Turn the [ ] dial to set the aperture value
(2).
z When the ISO speed is xed, an
exposure level mark (4) based on
your specied values is shown on the
exposure level indicator for comparison
to the standard exposure level (3). The
exposure level mark is shown as [
] or
[ ] when the difference from standard
exposure exceeds 3 stops.
z The ISO speed is determined and screen
brightness changes when you press
the shutter button halfway after setting
the ISO speed to [AUTO]. If standard
exposure cannot be obtained with your
specied shutter speed and aperture
value, the ISO speed is displayed in
orange.
(
1
) (
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
Specic Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.
For details on available aperture values, see “Aperture” (
=
223).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the aperture value.
z Turn the [ ] dial to set the aperture
value.
● Orange display of the shutter speed when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been
obtained. Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (see below).
● [ ]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the
diaphragm in the lens)
● In [
] and [ ] modes, press the [ ] button and set
[Safety shift] on the [
6] tab to [On] (
=
31) to have the
camera automatically adjust the shutter speed and aperture value
when there are exposure problems, so that you can shoot at the
optimum exposure.
However, safety shift is disabled when the ash res.
101
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Shooting Long Exposures (Bulb)
With bulb exposures, shots are exposed for as long as you hold down the
shutter button.
1
Specify bulb exposure.
z Set the shutter speed to [BULB], following
steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Shutter Speeds
and Aperture Values ([ ] Mode)”
(
=
100).
2
Shoot.
z Shots are exposed for as long as you
hold the shutter button all the way down.
The elapsed exposure time is displayed
during exposure.
● Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it
still and prevent camera shake. In this case, also disable image
stabilization (
=
53).
● To avoid camera shake that may otherwise occur when pressing
the shutter button directly, you can shoot remotely (
=
165) or
use an optional remote switch (
=
186).
● When [Touch Shutter] is set to [Enable], shooting is started by
touching the screen once and stopped by touching it again. Be
careful not to move the camera when touching the screen.
● After you set the shutter speed and aperture value, the exposure
level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.
● Screen brightness may change depending on your specied
shutter speed and aperture value. However, screen brightness
remains the same when the ash is up and the mode is set to [
].
● Image brightness may be affected by Auto Lighting Optimizer
(
=
82).
● [ ]: Manual
● Calculation of optimum exposure is based on the specied
metering method (
=
79).
● The following operations are available when ISO speed is set to
[AUTO].
- Adjust exposure by turning the exposure compensation dial.
- Press the [
] button to lock the ISO speed. Screen brightness
changes accordingly.
102
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Recording Movies at Specic Shutter
Speeds and Aperture Values
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed, exposure, aperture value, and ISO
speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, aperture values, and ISO speeds,
see “Shutter” (
=
223), “Aperture” (
=
223), and “Changing the ISO
Speed” (
=
80).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Hold down the mode dial release button
and turn the mode dial to [ ].
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
30).
2
Congure the settings.
z Turn the [ ] dial to set the shutter
speed.
z Turn the [
] dial to set the aperture
value.
3
Shoot.
z Press the movie button.
z You can also adjust settings while
recording, as described in step 2.
● Some shutter speeds may cause ickering on the screen when
recording under uorescent or LED lighting, which may be
recorded.
Adjusting the Flash Output
Still Images
Movies
Choose from the three ash levels in [ ][ ][ ] modes.
1
Specify the ash mode.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
31).
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Flash Mode], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Manual], and then press
the [ ] button.
2
Congure the setting.
z Raise the ash, press the [ ] button and
immediately turn the [ ] dial to choose
the ash level, and then press the [ ]
button.
z Once the setting is complete, the ash
output level is displayed.
[ ]: Minimum, [ ]: Medium, [ ]:
Maximum
● You can also set the ash level by accessing MENU (
=
31)
and choosing [
5] tab > [Flash Control] > [Flash Output].
● You can also access the [Flash Control] screen (
=
31) as
follows.
- Press and hold the [
] button for at least one second.
- When the ash is up, press the [
] button and immediately
press the [
] button.
103
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Customizing Controls and Display
Customizing Display Information
Customize what screen is displayed when you press the [ ] button on the
shooting screen. You can also customize what information is displayed.
1
Access the setting screen.
z On the [ 1] tab, choose [Screen info/
toggle settings] or [VF info/ toggle
settings] in [Shooting information display],
and then press the [ ] button (
=
31).
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose any screen you prefer not
to display, and then press the [ ] button
to remove the [ ] mark. Pressing the
[ ] button again will add the [ ] mark,
which indicates that it is selected for
display.
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
● An example of display with the options selected in step 2 is shown
at left for reference.
● At least one option must be selected.
● When the ISO speed is set to [AUTO], you can also adjust the
exposure before recording by turning the exposure compensation
dial.
● When the ISO speed is xed, an exposure level mark based on
your specied value is shown on the exposure level indicator for
comparison to the standard exposure level. The exposure level
mark is shown as [
] or [ ] when the difference from standard
exposure exceeds 3 stops.
● You can check the ISO speed in [AUTO] mode by pressing the
shutter button halfway. If standard exposure cannot be obtained
with your specied shutter speed and aperture value, the ISO
speed is displayed in orange.
● Focus can be adjusted during recording by touching [ ] (to
switch it to [
]) and then pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
104
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Conguring Touch & Drag AF
Still Images
Movies
With Touch & Drag AF, you can move the AF frame by touching or
dragging the screen while looking through the viewnder.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Choose [Touch & drag AF settings] on the
[ 2] tab, and then press the [ ] button
(
=
31).
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose [Touch & drag AF], select
[Enable], and then press the [ ] button.
● When you choose MENU (
=
31) > [ 4] tab > [Touch Operation]
> [Disable], [Touch & drag AF] is set to [Disable] and cannot be
changed.
● AF frames may not be displayed correctly if you switch to
viewnder display while touching the screen. In this case, lift your
nger and touch the screen again.
Customizing the Information Displayed
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Customizing
Display Information” (
=
103) to choose
[Custom display 1] or [Custom display 2],
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose information to display, and
then press the [ ] button to add a [ ]
mark.
z To see an example of display, press the
[ ] button to return to the [Screen
info/ toggle settings] or [VF info/ toggle
settings] screen.
● For a smaller grid pattern, access [ 1] tab > [Shooting
information display] > [Grid display].
● The following settings are available by choosing [
1] tab >
[Shooting information display] > [Histogram].
- Switch from a brightness histogram to an RGB histogram.
- Reduce the size of the histogram displayed.
105
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Assigning Functions to Controls
Still Images
Movies
Reassign functions of the shutter button, [
] button, [ ] ring, [ ]
dial, or [ ] dial, or assign common functions to the movie button or [ ]
button.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Function Assignment] on the [ 2] tab,
and then press the [ ] button (
=
31).
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ][ ] dials to choose the dial or
button to assign, and then press the [ ]
button.
z When assigning the shutter button, [
]
button, [ ] ring, [ ] dial, or [ ] dial,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the shooting mode or the
camera control, press the [ ][ ] buttons
to choose the shooting mode or function,
and then press the [ ] button.
z When assigning the movie button or [
]
button, press the [ ] button, choose the
function on the screen displayed (either
press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [
][ ] dials), and then press the
[ ] button.
Changing the Settings of Touch and Drag Operations
z Choose [Pos’n method] in step 1 of
“Conguring Touch & Drag AF” (
=
104)
and choose the desired option.
Absolute
The AF frame moves to the touched or dragged position on
the screen.
Relative
The AF frame moves in the direction you drag, by an
amount corresponding to the amount you drag, no matter
where you touch the screen.
Restricting the Area of the Screen Available for Touch and
Drag Operations
z Follow step 1 in “Conguring Touch &
Drag AF” (
=
104) and choose [Active
touch area].
z Choose the area that will be available for
this feature.
106
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
● To restore the default settings to the movie button and [ ]
button, choose [
] and [ ].
● Icons labeled with a [
] sign indicate that the function is not
available in the current shooting mode or under current function
conditions.
● With [
], each press of the assigned button adjusts and locks
the focus, and [
] is displayed on the screen.
● With [
], pressing the assigned button deactivates screen
display. To restore the display, do any of the following.
- Operate any camera control other than the power button
- Hold the camera in another orientation
- Open or close the screen
- Raise or lower the ash
● You can still record movies in [
], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode even
if you assign a function to the movie button.
● You can still choose the direction to move the camera in [
]
mode if you assign a function to the [
] button.
Shutter button or
[ ] button
[AF/AE lock]
Enable exposure lock by
pressing the [
] button, after
focusing by pressing the
shutter button halfway.
[AE lock/AF]
Enable exposure lock by
pressing the shutter button
halfway, and focusing by
pressing the [ ] button.
[AF/AF lock,
no AE lock]
Enable focus lock by pressing
the [
] button.
[AE/AF, no
AE lock]
Enable exposure
compensation by pressing the
shutter button halfway, and
focusing by pressing the [
]
button.
[
] ring, [ ] dial,
or [ ] dial
Enable conguration of the assigned function in
[
], [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode by turning
the [ ] ring, [ ] dial, or [ ] dial.
Movie button
Press the button to activate the assigned
function.
[
] button
107
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Rearranging Menu Items
1
Access the setting screen.
z On the screen in step 2 of “Choosing
Items to Include in the Menu” (
=
107),
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an icon to move, and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the new position, and then
press the [ ] button.
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [OK]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
Customizing the Quick Set Menu
Still Images
Movies
The display of Quick Set menu items can be customized.
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Quick
setting menu layout] on the [ 2] tab,
and then press the [ ] button (
=
31).
2
Choose icons to include in the
menu.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an icon, and then press
the [ ] button to label icons you want to
display in the Quick Set menu with [ ].
z Selected items (labeled with a [ ]) will
be included in display.
z Items without a [ ] can be congured on
the [ ] tab of the menu screen.
3
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [OK]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[
] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
● Up to 11 items can be displayed in the menu.
● The screen in step 2 can also be accessed by holding down the
[
] button when the Quick Set menu is displayed.
108
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
3
Save the settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Register settings], and
then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a custom shooting mode to
assign, and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK] after the conrmation
message, and then press the [ ] button.
● To edit saved settings (except their shooting mode), choose [ ]
or [
], change the settings, and then repeat steps 2 – 3. These
setting details are not applied in other shooting modes.
● To reset saved settings to their defaults, choose [Clear settings]
on the screen in step 3, press the [
] button, and then choose
the custom shooting mode. On the conrmation screen displayed
next, choose [OK] and press the [
] button.
● To automatically update your saved settings with any changes to
settings that you make while shooting in [
] or [ ] mode, set
[Auto update set.] to [Enable] on the screen in step 3.
Saving Shooting Settings
Still Images
Movies
Save commonly used shooting modes and your congured function
settings for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply turn the mode
dial to [ ] or [ ]. Even settings that are usually cleared when you
switch shooting modes or turn the camera off (such as self-timer settings)
can be retained this way.
Settings That Can Be Saved
● Shooting modes ([ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ])
● Items set in [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] modes (
=
78 –
=
100)
● Shooting menu settings
● Zoom positions
● Manual focus positions (
=
89)
● My Menu settings (
=
109)
1
Enter a shooting mode with settings
you want to save, and change the
settings as desired.
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Custom shooting mode (C1, C2)] on the
[ 5] tab, and then press the [ ] button.
109
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
3
Rearrange menu items, as needed.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Sort registered items], and
then press the [ ] button.
z Choose a menu item to move (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to change the order, and then press
the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ] button.
● Grayed-out items in step 2 can also be specied, but they may
not be available in some shooting modes.
● You can add up to [ 5] by repeating this process from step 1.
● Choosing [Delete all items on tab] on the screen in step 2 will
delete all items added to the tab.
● On the [Select item to register] screen for saving or clearing
items, you can also touch items to select them.
● On the [Sort registered items] screen, you can also drag items to
change the display order.
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)
Still Images
Movies
You can save up to six commonly used shooting menu items on the [
1]
tab. By customizing the [ 1] tab, you can access these items quickly
from a single screen.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Add
My Menu tab] on the [ 1] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
31).
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Choose [Set up MYMENU1] on the [
1]
tab, and then press the [ ] button.
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Select item to register],
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a menu item to save (max.
six items) and then press the [ ] button
to save it.
z [
] is displayed.
z To cancel saving, press the [
] button.
[ ] is no longer displayed.
z Press the [
] button.
110
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Deleting All My Menu Tabs or Items
1
Choose an item.
z On the screen in step 1 of “Saving
Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)” (
=
109), choose [Delete all
My Menu tabs] or [Delete all items], and
then press the [ ] button.
2
Delete the item.
z Choosing [Delete all My Menu tabs] will
delete all My Menu tabs and restore the
default [ ] tab.
z Choosing [Delete all items] will delete all
items added to tabs [
1] to [ 5].
Customizing My Menu Tab Display
Specify which screen is displayed when the [ ] button is pressed in
Shooting mode.
z On the screen in step 1 of “Saving
Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)” (
=
109), choose [Menu
display], and then choose an item as
desired.
Normal display
Display the most recent menu, as
shown for your previous operation.
Display from My Menu tab
Start display from [
] tab screens.
Display only My Menu tab
Restrict display to [
] tab screens.
Renaming My Menu Tabs
1
Choose [Rename tab].
z Following steps 2 – 3 in “Saving
Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)” (
=
109), choose [Rename
tab] and press the [ ] button.
2
Change the tab name.
z Use the keyboard displayed to enter the
new tab name (
=
32).
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
[ ] button.
Deleting a My Menu Tab
1
Choose [Delete tab].
z Following steps 2 – 3 in “Saving
Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)” (
=
109), choose [Delete
tab] and press the [ ] button.
2
Delete the item.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
111
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Playback
Still Images
Movies
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1
Enter Playback mode.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Your last shot is displayed.
2
Choose images.
z To view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
[ ] dial clockwise.
z Press and hold the [ ][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
z To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), turn the [
] dial rapidly. In this
mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through
images.
z To return to single-image display, press
the [ ] button.
z To browse images grouped by shooting
date, press the [
][ ] buttons in Scroll
Display mode.
z Movies are identied by a [
] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
Playback Mode
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit
them in many ways
● To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [ ]
button to enter Playback mode.
● It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were
renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other
cameras.
112
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Touch-Screen Operations
z To view the next image, drag left across
the screen, and to view the previous
image, drag right.
z To access Scroll Display mode, quickly
drag left or right repeatedly.
z You can also browse through images in
Scroll Display mode by dragging left or
right.
z Touching the central image will restore
single-image display.
z To browse images grouped by shooting
date in Scroll Display mode, quickly drag
up or down.
z To start movie playback, touch [
] in step
2 of “Playback” (
=
111).
z To adjust the volume during movie
playback, quickly drag up or down across
the screen.
z To stop playback, touch the screen. The
screen shown at left is displayed, and the
following operations are available.
z Touch [
] to display the volume panel,
and then touch [
][ ] to adjust the
volume. At a volume of 0, [
] is displayed.
z To switch frames, touch the scrollbar or
drag left or right.
z To resume playback, touch [
].
z Touch [
] to return to the screen in
step 2 of “Playback” (
=
111).
3
Play movies.
z To start playback, press the [ ] button to
access the movie control panel, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button again.
4
Adjust the volume.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the
volume.
z To adjust the volume when the volume
indicator (1) is no longer displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons.
5
Pause playback.
z To pause or resume playback, press the
[ ] button.
z After the movie is nished, [ ] is
displayed.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
● White lines indicating the aspect ratio are displayed when you
view RAW images. These lines are shown on the top and bottom
of images shot at an aspect ratio of [
] and on the left and right
of images shot at an aspect ratio of [
] or [ ].
● To deactivate Scroll Display, choose MENU (
=
31) > [ 5]
tab > [Scroll Display] > [Off].
● To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback
mode, choose MENU (
=
31) > [ 5] tab > [Resume] > [Last
shot].
● To change the transition shown between images, access MENU
(
=
31) and choose your desired effect on the [ 5] tab >
[Transition Effect].
(
1
)
113
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)
Still Images
Movies
Washed-out highlights in the image ash on the screen in detailed
information display (
=
113).
Histogram
Still Images
Movies
z Information displays 2 – 5 include a graph
on the top called a histogram, which
shows the distribution of brightness in
images. The horizontal axis represents
the degree of brightness, and the vertical
axis, how much of the image is at each
level of brightness. Viewing the histogram
is a way to check exposure.
RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display
Still Images
Movies
z Information display 3 includes an RGB
histogram, showing the distribution
of reds, greens, and blues in images.
The horizontal axis represents R, G,
or B brightness, and the vertical axis,
how much of the image is at that level
of brightness. Viewing this histogram
enables you to check image color
characteristics.
z Still images and movies you shoot can be
geotagged using GPS information (such
as latitude, longitude, and elevation)
from a Bluetooth enabled smartphone
(
=
164). You can review this information
in the GPS information display.
z Latitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC
(shooting date and time) are listed from
top to bottom.
Switching Display Modes
Still Images
Movies
Press the [
] button in Playback mode to switch from no information
display to Info display 1 (basic info) and then to Info display 2 – 5 (details).
Open the screen to activate it when the camera is on. This will deactivate
the viewnder. Similarly, close the screen (facing the camera body) to
deactivate it and activate the viewnder (
=
21).
● Switching display modes is not possible while the camera is
connected via Wi-Fi to devices other than printers.
Customizing the Shooting Information Displayed
Customize the information shown on each screen. For details on the
information available, see “During Playback” (
=
205).
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Playback information display] on the
[ 6] tab, and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose information to display.
z Choose information to display, and then
press the [ ] button to add a [ ] mark.
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[ ] button.
● An example of display with the options selected in step 2 is shown
at left for reference.
114
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)
Still Images
Movies
View digest movies recorded automatically in [
] mode (
=
37) on a
day of still image shooting as follows.
1
Choose an image.
z Still images shot in [ ] mode are
labeled with [ ] icon.
z Choose a still image labeled with
[ ] and press the [ ] button.
2
Play the digest movie.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
z The movie recorded automatically on the
day of still image shooting is played back,
from the beginning.
● After a moment, [ ] will no longer be displayed when
you are using the camera with information display deactivated
(
=
113).
Viewing by Date
Digest movies can be viewed by date.
z Press the [
] button, choose [List/
Play Digest Movies] on the [ 2] tab,
and then touch a date (
=
31).
● [---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available
on your smartphone or items not recorded correctly.
● An RGB histogram can also be shown at the top of information
displays 2 – 5. Choose one of the information display options from
2 to 5 in [Playback information display] on tab [
6], press the
[
] button, choose [RGB], and then press the [ ] button. Note
that information display 3 will show a brightness histogram on the
bottom of the screen.
● The brightness histogram can also be accessed while shooting
(
=
104,
=
204).
● UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as
Greenwich Mean Time
● GPS information display is not available for images that lack this
information.
● You can also switch between the RGB histogram and GPS
information display by dragging the lower half of the screen
upward or downward in detailed information display.
115
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Browsing and Filtering Images
Navigating through Images in an Index
Still Images
Movies
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly nd the images
you are looking for.
1
Display images in an index.
z Move the zoom lever toward [ ] to
display images in an index. Moving the
lever again will increase the number of
images shown.
z To display fewer images, move the zoom
lever toward [
]. Fewer images are
shown each time you move the lever.
2
Choose an image.
z Turn the [ ] dial to scroll through the
images.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image.
z An orange frame is displayed around the
selected image.
z Press the [
] button to view the selected
image in single-image display.
● To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial rapidly), choose MENU
(
=
31) > [ 5] tab > [Index Effect] > [Off].
Checking People Detected in Face ID
Still Images
Movies
If you switch the camera to simple information display mode (
=
113),
the names of up to ve detected people registered in Face ID (
=
45)
will be displayed.
z Press the [
] button several times until
simple information display is activated,
and then press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose an image.
z Names will be displayed on detected
people.
● If you prefer not to have names displayed on images shot using
Face ID, choose MENU (
=
31) > [ 3] tab > [Face ID Info] >
[Name Display] > [Off].
116
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
1
Choose the rst condition.
z In single-image display, press the [ ]
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
choose a condition.
z When [ ] or [ ] is selected, you can
view only images matching this condition
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial. To perform an action for all
of these images together, press the [ ]
button and go to step 3.
2
Choose the second condition and
view the ltered images.
z When you have selected [ ] or [ ] as
the rst condition, choose the second
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then
turn the [ ] dial to view only matching
images.
z To switch to ltered image display, press
the [
] button and go to step 3.
z When you have selected [ ] as the rst
condition, press the [ ] button, and
press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons on the
next screen to choose a person.
3
View the ltered images.
z Images matching your conditions are
displayed in yellow frames. To view only
these images, press the [ ][ ] buttons, or
turn the [ ] dial.
z To cancel ltered display, press the [
]
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
then press the [ ] button again.
● When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
conditions, those conditions will not be available.
Touch-Screen Operations
z Pinch in to switch from single-image
display to index display.
z To view more thumbnails per screen,
pinch in again.
z Drag up or down on the screen to scroll
through displayed images.
z To view fewer thumbnails per screen,
spread your ngers apart.
z Touch an image to choose it, and touch it
again to view it in single-image display.
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions
Still Images
Movies
Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by ltering
image display according to your specied conditions. You can also protect
(
=
121) or delete (
=
123) these images all at once.
Favorites
Displays images tagged as favorites (
=
126).
Shot Date
Displays the images shot on a specic date.
People
Displays images with detected faces.
Still image/Movie
Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in
[
] mode (=
37).
Name
Displays images of a registered person (=
45).
117
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
1
Choose a condition.
z Choose a condition (or jump method) in
single-image display by turning the [ ]
dial and immediately pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons.
2
View images matching your
specied condition, or jump by the
specied amount.
z Turn the [ ] dial to view only images
matching the condition or jump by the
specied number of images forward or
back.
Touch-Screen Operations
z You can also jump to the previous or next
image according to your jump method
chosen in step 1 of “Using the Front Dial
to Jump between Images” (
=
117) by
dragging left or right with two ngers.
● To show or hide information, press the [ ] button in step 3.
● Options for viewing the images found (in step 3) include
“Navigating through Images in an Index” (
=
115), “Magnifying
Images” (
=
120), and “Viewing Slideshows” (
=
121). You can
also apply image operations to all images found, by choosing
[Protect All Images in Search] in “Protecting Images” (
=
121) or
[Select All Images in Search] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once”
(
=
124), “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (
=
194), or
“Adding Images to a Photobook” (
=
197).
● If you edit images and save them as new images (
=
128 –
=
135), a message is displayed, and the images that were
found are no longer shown.
● You can also choose conditions by touching the screens in steps
1 and 2.
● After choosing conditions, you can view images matching your
conditions by touching a condition again.
Using the Front Dial to Jump between Images
Still Images
Movies
Use the front dial to nd and jump between desired images quickly by
ltering image display according to your specied conditions.
Jump to Favorites
Displays images tagged as favorites (
=
126).
Jump Shot Date
Jumps to the rst image in each group of
images that were shot on the same date.
Single image
Jumps by 1 image at a time.
Jump 10 Images
Jumps by 10 images at a time.
Jump 100 Images
Jumps by 100 images at a time.
118
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
● During group playback (step 3), you can browse through images
quickly “Navigating through Images in an Index” (
=
115) and
magnify them “Magnifying Images” (
=
120). You can apply your
actions to all images in the group at once by choosing [Protect All
Images in Group] in “Protecting Images” (
=
121), [All Images in
Group] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once” (
=
124), [Select All
in Group] in “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (
=
194),
or [Select All Images] in “Adding Images to a Photobook”
(
=
197).
● To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single still
images, choose MENU (
=
31) > [ 5] tab > [Group Images]
> [Off] (
=
31). However, grouped images cannot be ungrouped
during individual playback.
Viewing Individual Images in a Group
Still Images
Movies
Individual still images saved in [ ] mode (
=
68) are grouped, so
that only the rst image is displayed, but you can also view the images
individually.
1
Choose a grouped image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image labeled with
[ ].
2
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
30).
3
View images in the group
individually.
z Pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the
[ ] dial will display only images in the
group.
z To cancel group playback, press the [ ]
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
press the [ ] button again (
=
30).
119
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
4
Choose the name of the person to
overwrite with.
z Follow step 2 in “Overwriting and Adding
Face Information” (
=
48) to choose
the name of the person you want to
overwrite with.
● You can also access the [Edit ID Info] screen by touching an
image on the screen in step 2, touching [
] to display the
orange frame, and then touching the face to overwrite its name.
● You can also choose editing options by touching them in step 3.
Erasing Names
z On the screen displayed in step 3 in
“Changing Names” (
=
119), choose
[Erase] and press the [ ] button.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
Editing Face ID Information
If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it
or erase it.
However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face
ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been
erased.
Changing Names
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Face ID Info] on the [ 3] tab (
=
31).
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Edit ID Info], and then
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
z Following the procedure in “Checking
People Detected in Face ID” (
=
115),
choose an image and press the [ ]
button.
z An orange frame is displayed around the
selected face. When multiple names are
displayed in an image, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the
name to change, and then press the [ ]
button.
3
Choose the editing option.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [Overwrite], and
then press the [ ] button.
120
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Touch-Screen Operations
z Spread your ngers apart (pinch out) to
zoom in.
z You can magnify images up to about 10x
by repeating this action.
z To move the display position, drag across
the screen.
z Pinch in to zoom out.
z Touch [ ] to restore single-image
display.
Double-Touch Magnication
z Quickly touch the screen twice to magnify
the image about 3x.
z To return to single-image display from
magnied display, quickly touch the
screen twice.
Image Viewing Options
Magnifying Images
Still Images
Movies
1
Magnify an image.
z Moving the zoom lever toward [ ] will
zoom in and magnify the image. You
can magnify images up to about 10x by
continuing to hold the zoom lever.
z The approximate position of the displayed
area (1) is shown for reference.
z To zoom out, move the zoom lever
toward [
]. You can return to single-
image display by continuing to hold it.
2
Move the display position and
switch images as needed.
z To move the display position, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
z To switch to other images while zoomed,
turn the [ ] dial.
● You can return to single-image display from magnied display by
pressing the [
] button.
● You can check the focus when [
] is displayed by pressing
the [
] button to show the position in focus (Focus Check).
When multiple positions are in focus, press the [
] button
repeatedly to switch to other positions.
(
1
)
121
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Protecting Images
Still Images
Movies
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure (
=
123).
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and then choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial). [ ] is displayed.
z To cancel protection, choose [OFF]. [ ]
is no longer displayed.
● Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format
the card (
=
171).
● Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure
function. To erase them this way, rst cancel protection.
Using the Menu
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Protect] on the [ 1] tab (
=
31).
2
Choose a selection method.
z Choose an option as desired (
=
31).
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
Viewing Slideshows
Still Images
Movies
Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows.
z Press the [
] button, and then
choose [Slideshow] on the [ 1] tab
(
=
31).
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Start], and then press the
[ ] button.
z The slideshow will start after [Loading
image] is displayed for a few seconds.
z Press the [
] button to stop the
slideshow.
● The camera’s power-saving functions (
=
27) are deactivated
during slideshows.
● To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button.
● You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. For fast-forward or fast-
rewind, hold the [
][ ] buttons down.
● You can congure slideshow repetition, display time per image,
and the transition between images on the screen accessed by
choosing [Set up] and pressing the [
] button (
=
31).
● You can also stop slideshows by touching the screen.
122
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
z Following the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (
=
121), choose [Select Range]
and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a starting image.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose an ending image.
z Press the [ ] button to choose [Last
image], and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
z Images before the rst image cannot be
selected as the last image.
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
z Following the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (
=
121), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
z To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [
] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3
Protect the image.
z Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or
turn the camera off before nishing the setup process in step 3.
● You can also select or clear images by touching the screen in
step 2, and you can access the conrmation screen by touching
[
].
● You can also protect images by touching [OK] on the screen in
step 3.
123
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Erasing Images
Still Images
Movies
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However,
protected images (
=
121) cannot be erased.
1
Choose an image to erase.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
2
Erase the image.
z Press the [ ] button.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the [ ]
button.
z The current image is now erased.
z To cancel erasure, press the [
][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
● For images captured in both RAW and JPEG format, pressing the
[
] button while the image is displayed gives you the option of
choosing [Erase
], [Erase ], or [Erase ].
● You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the
screen in step 2.
● Images can also be erased by using Touch Actions (
=
127).
4
Protect the images.
z Press the [ ] button to choose [Protect],
and then press the [ ] button.
● To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in
step 4.
● You can also display the screen for choosing the rst or last
image by touching an image on the top screen in steps 2 or 3.
● You can also protect images by touching [Protect] on the screen
in step 4.
Protecting All Images at Once
1
Choose [Protect All Images].
z Following the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (
=
121), choose [Protect All
Images] and press the [ ] button.
2
Protect the images.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Clearing All Protection at Once
You can clear protection from all images at once.
To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting
All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2.
124
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
124), choose
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
z Once you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
(
=
122), [ ] is displayed.
z To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3
Erase the images.
z Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Choosing an image captured in both RAW and JPEG format will
erase both versions.
Erasing Multiple Images at Once
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected
images (
=
121) cannot be erased.
Choosing a Selection Method
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Erase] on the [ 1] tab
(
=
31).
2
Choose a selection method.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a selection method, and
then press the [ ] button.
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[ ] button.
125
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Rotating Images
Still Images
Movies
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.
1
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
30).
2
Rotate the image.
z Press the [ ] or [ ] button, depending
on the desired direction. Each time you
press the button, the image is rotated
90°. Press the [ ] button to complete the
setting.
● Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off]
(
=
126).
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Rotate].
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Rotate] on the [ 1] tab (
=
31).
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
124), choose
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose images.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
122) to specify images.
3
Erase the images.
z Press the [ ] button to choose [Erase],
and then press the [ ] button.
Specifying All Images at Once
1
Choose [Select All Images].
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
124), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
2
Erase the images.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[
] button.
126
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Tagging Images as Favorites
Still Images
Movies
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a
category in ltered playback, you can restrict the following operations to
all of those images.
● “Playback” (
=
111), “Viewing Slideshows” (
=
121), “Protecting
Images” (
=
121), “Erasing Images” (
=
123), “Adding Images to
the Print List (DPOF)” (
=
194), “Adding Images to a Photobook”
(
=
197)
z Press the [
] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
30).
z To untag the image, repeat this process
and choose [OFF], and then press the
[ ] button.
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Favorites].
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Favorites] on the [ 1] tab (
=
31).
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
z To untag the image, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
2
Rotate the image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
z The image is rotated 90° each time you
press the [ ] button.
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[ ] button.
● On the screen in step 2, you can also touch [ ] to rotate
images or touch [
] to return to the menu screen.
Deactivating Auto Rotation
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates
images based on the current camera orientation.
z Press the [
] button, choose [Auto
Rotate] on the [ 5] tab, and then
choose [Off] (
=
31).
● Images cannot be rotated (
=
125) when you set [Auto Rotate]
to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in
the original orientation.
127
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Convenient Control: Touch Actions
Still Images
Movies
You can quickly and easily activate functions that you have assigned to
four touch gestures (Touch Actions), in single-image display.
Using Touch Actions Functions
z Drag across the screen as shown.
z The function assigned to [ ] is now
activated.
z Similarly, you can also activate functions
assigned to [
], [ ], and [ ] by
dragging across the screen.
z Customize functions assigned to Touch
Actions as desired.
Changing Touch Actions Functions
Simplify your preferred camera operations by reassigning dragging
patterns to them as desired.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Set Touch Actions] on the [
6]
tab (
=
31).
3
Finish the setup process.
z Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting
mode or turn the camera off before nishing the setup process in
step 3.
● Tagging images as favorites makes it easier to add them when
creating albums (
=
136).
● You can also select or clear current images by touching the
screen in step 2.
● Images can also be tagged as favorites by using Touch Actions
(
=
127).
128
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Editing Still Images
● Image editing (
=
128 –
=
131) is only available when the
memory card has sufcient free space.
● You can access editing screens for various functions by touching
an image after choosing the function in the menu.
● When [
] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch
[
] instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer.
● When [
] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch
[
] instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer.
Resizing Images
Still Images
Movies
Save a copy of images at a lower number of recording pixels.
1
Choose an image size.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose an image size
(
=
30).
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Save the new image.
z After [Save new image?] is displayed,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
z The image is now saved as a new le.
2
Assign a function to a Touch Action.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a dragging pattern, and
then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a function to assign.
Assignable Functions
Slideshow Start a slideshow.
Erase Erase an image.
Protect Protect an image or cancel protection.
Rotate Rotate an image.
Favorites Tag images as favorites, or untag the image.
Next Favorite
Switch to displaying the next image tagged as a
favorite.
Previous Favorite
Switch to displaying the previous image tagged as
a favorite.
Next Date
Switch to displaying the rst image with the next
shooting date.
Previous Date
Switch to displaying the rst image with the previous
shooting date.
To Camera
Access the Wi-Fi connection screen.
For Wi-Fi details, see “Wireless Features” (
=
141).
To Smartphone
To Computer
To Printer
To Web Service
129
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
4
Save as a new image and review.
z Follow step 2 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
128).
z Press the [
] button and follow step
3 in “Resizing Images” (
=
128).
Cropping
Still Images
Movies
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image le.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then press the [ ] button
(
=
30).
2
Resize, move, and adjust the aspect
ratio of the cropping frame.
z To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
z To move the frame, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
z To change the frame orientation, turn the
[
] dial to choose [ ], and then press
the [ ] button.
z To change the frame aspect ratio, turn
the [
] dial to choose [ ]. To switch
between aspect ratios ([ ], [ ],
[ ], and [ ]), press the [ ] button
repeatedly.
3
Review the new image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Processed img.], and then
press the [ ] button.
z The saved image is now displayed.
● Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting
of [
].
● RAW images cannot be edited.
● Images cannot be resized to a higher number of recording pixels.
● You can also view saved images by touching [Processed img.] on
the screen in step 3.
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Resize].
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Resize] on the [ 3] tab (
=
31).
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [
] button.
3
Choose an image size.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the size, and then press
the [ ] button.
130
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Applying Filter Effects
Apply effects equivalent to shooting in [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and
[ ] modes to images and save them as separate images.
1
Choose an effect.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and then choose the effect
(
=
30).
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Adjust the effect as needed.
z [ ]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust
contrast.
z [
]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust
defocusing.
z [
] or [ ]: Touch or drag the bar on the
bottom of the screen to adjust the level of
the effect.
z [ ]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust
color saturation.
z [
]: Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust
color tone.
z [
]: Move the zoom lever to resize the
frame, and turn the [ ] dial to move it.
3
Save as a new image and review.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
128).
3
Preview the cropped image.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ].
z To switch display between the cropped
image and the cropping frame, press the
[
] button repeatedly.
4
Save as a new image and review.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
128).
● RAW images cannot be edited.
● Cropped images cannot be cropped again.
● Cropped images cannot be resized or have Creative lters
applied.
● Cropped images will have a lower number of recording pixels than
uncropped images.
● While previewing the cropped image in step 3, you can resize,
move, and adjust the aspect ratio of the cropping frame.
● Operations in step 2 are also possible by pressing the [
]
button, choosing [
3] tab > [Cropping], pressing the [ ]
button, choosing an image, and pressing the [
] button again.
● If you crop still images shot using Face ID (
=
45), only the
names of the people left in the cropped image will remain.
● You can also move the cropping frame in step 2 by dragging it.
You can also resize frames by pinching in or out (
=
120) on the
screen.
● Operations are also possible by touching [
], [ ], [ ], and
[
] on the top of the screen in step 2.
131
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
4
Save as a new image and review.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
z The image is now saved as a new le.
z Press the [
] button and follow step
3 in “Resizing Images” (
=
128).
● Some images may not be corrected accurately.
● To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be
erased.
● Protected images cannot be overwritten.
● RAW images cannot be edited this way.
● Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images also captured
in RAW format, but the original image cannot be overwritten.
● You can also save images by touching [New File] or [Overwrite]
on the screen in step 4.
● The same operations are available by pressing the [ ]
button and choosing [
2] tab > [Creative lters], choosing an
image, and pressing the [
] button.
● [
]: To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press
the [
][ ] buttons on the screen in step 2. To move the frame,
press the [
][ ] buttons again. To return the frame to horizontal
orientation, press the [
][ ] buttons.
● You can also adjust the effect by touching or dragging the bar on
the bottom of the screen in step 2. For [
], you can also move
the frame by touching or dragging across the screen.
Correcting Red-Eye
Still Images
Movies
Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the
corrected image as a separate le.
1
Choose [Red-Eye Correction].
z Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the
[ 3] tab (
=
31).
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
3
Correct the image.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Red-eye detected by the camera is now
corrected, and frames are displayed
around corrected image areas.
z Enlarge or reduce images as needed.
Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images”
(
=
120).
132
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
5
Save the image.
z If you have chosen [ ], press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ].
Press the [ ] button, choose [OK] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button
again.
z If you have chosen [
], press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
Brightness adjustment Adjust brightness.
White balance Choose a white balance.
Picture Style Choose a Picture Style.
Auto Lighting Optimizer Set Auto Lighting Optimizer details.
High ISO speed NR Set noise reduction details.
Image quality
Set the image quality level of the resulting
JPEG image.
● You can also choose an effect for a selected processing condition
on the screen in step 3 by turning the [
] dial.
● For magnied display on the screen in step 3, move the zoom
lever toward [
].
● To restore the original settings, on the screen in step 3, press the
[
] button, choose [OK] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [
] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
● You can congure advanced settings for functions labeled with
[
] on the screen in step 4 by pressing the [ ] button.
● To compare the current image to the original image before saving
in step 5, press the [
] button and turn the [ ] dial. To return to
the setting screen, press the [
] button.
Processing RAW Images with the Camera
Still Images
Movies
Process images captured in RAW format on the camera. The original
RAW image is retained, and a copy is saved as a JPEG.
1
Choose a RAW image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a RAW image.
2
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, and choose [ ]
in the menu. Choose the desired option
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial).
z When choosing [ ], go to step 5.
3
Set the processing conditions.
z If you have chosen [ ], press the [ ]
button, press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons
to choose an option, and then press the
[ ] button.
4
Congure advanced settings.
z Choose an effect (either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button to return to the
screen in step 3.
133
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
z Following the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (
=
133), choose [Select Range]
and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose images.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
122) to specify images.
3
Process the images.
z Follow steps 2 – 5 in “Processing RAW
Images with the Camera” (
=
132) to
process the images.
● Images produced by in-camera processing will not match those
processed with Digital Photo Professional exactly.
● Up to 500 images can be selected at one time.
Using the Menu
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[RAW img processing] on the [ 3] tab
(
=
31).
2
Choose a selection method.
z Choose an option as desired (
=
31).
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
z Following the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (
=
133), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
z Once you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
(
=
122), [ ] is displayed.
z To cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to specify other
images.
z Press the [
] button to go to the
next screen.
3
Process the image.
z Follow steps 2 – 5 in “Processing RAW
Images with the Camera” (
=
132) to
process the image.
134
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
3
Review the edited movie.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button. The
edited movie is now played.
z To edit the movie again, repeat step 2.
z To cancel editing, press the [ ]
button, choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
4
Save the edited movie.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
z Choose [Save w/o Comp.], and then
press the [
] button.
z The movie is now saved as a new le.
● To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be
erased.
● If the memory card lacks sufcient space, only [Overwrite] will be
available.
● Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving
is in progress.
● When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery
pack.
● You can also edit movies by touching the movie editing panel or
editing bar.
Editing Movies
Still Images
Movies
You can remove unneeded portions from the beginning and end of
movies.
1
Choose [ ].
z Following steps 1 – 5 in “Playback”
(
=
111), choose [ ] and press the [ ]
button.
z The movie editing panel and editing bar
are now displayed.
2
Specify portions to cut.
z (1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is
the editing bar.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ]
or [ ].
z To specify a portion to cut (indicated by
[ ]), press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to move the orange [ ] or
[ ] icon. Cut the beginning of the movie
(from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and cut the
end of the movie by choosing [ ].
z If you move [ ] or [ ] to a position other
than a [ ] mark, in [ ] the portion
before the nearest [ ] mark on the left
will be cut, while in [ ] the portion after
the nearest [ ] mark on the right will be
cut.
(
1
)
(
2
)
135
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Erasing Movie Chapters
Still Images
Movies
Individual chapters (clips) (
=
37) recorded in [ ] mode can be
erased, as needed. Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot
be recovered.
1
Select the clip to erase.
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Viewing Short
Movies Created When Shooting Still
Images (Digest Movies)” (
=
114) to
play a short movie, and then press the
[ ] button to access the movie control
panel.
z To choose the clip, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ]
or [ ], and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
z The selected clip is played back
repeatedly.
3
Conrm erasure.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
z The clip is erased, and the short movie is
overwritten.
● [ ] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is
connected to a printer.
Reducing File Sizes
Movie le sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows.
z On the screen in step 2 of “Editing
Movies”, choose [
]. Choose [New File],
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose [Compress & Sav.], and then
press the [ ] button.
Image Quality of Compressed Movies
Before Compression After Compression
,
,
● [ ] and [ ] movies cannot be compressed.
● Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you
choose [Overwrite].
● Compressing movies to [
] or [ ] reduces the le
size while maintaining the same image quality.
136
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
1
Choose an image.
z Choose an image in single-image display.
z Themes available in step 3 will vary
depending on image shooting date and
Face ID information.
2
Access the home screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ], and
then press the [ ] button (
=
30).
z After [Busy] is displayed, the home
screen is displayed.
3
Preview an album.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
person or [Date] or [Event] as the album
theme, and then press the [ ] button.
z After [Loading] is displayed for a few
seconds, the album is played.
4
Save the album.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Save Album as Movie], and then press
the [ ] button.
z Once the album is saved, [Saved] is
displayed.
5
Play the album (=
111).
Viewing Albums (Story Highlights)
Still Images
Movies
You can choose themes such as a date or person’s name to create an
album of automatically selected images that match the theme. These
images are combined into a slideshow that can be saved as a short movie
of about 2 – 3 minutes.
Before using this feature, make sure the battery pack is fully charged.
Creating albums also requires free space on the memory card. As a
guideline, use a memory card with a capacity of 16 GB or higher, and
ensure at least 1 GB of free space.
Choosing Themes for Albums
Press the [ ] button and choose the Story Highlights icon. The home
screen is displayed, and you can choose the theme for the camera to use
when selecting album elements. Note that the camera is more likely to
add images tagged as favorites (
=
126) to albums.
Date
Creates an album of images shot on the same day.
Images are selected from those shot on the same day as the
image displayed before you access the home screen.
Person’s
name
Can be used to create monthly albums of people, such as
albums of children as they grow up.
Subjects whose Face ID information you registered before
shooting may be selected for albums.
Images selected are those that have the same subject shot
during the same month as the image displayed before you
access the home screen.
Event
A good choice for albums of vacations, parties, or other
events.
Images are selected from those shot during the event before
and after the image displayed before you access the home
screen.
Custom
Includes images based on your specied images, dates, or
people registered in Face ID.
137
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Adding Background Music to Albums
Still Images
Movies
Choose from seven kinds of background music to play during album
playback.
1
Register background music to a
memory card.
z Following steps 1 – 4 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (
=
136), choose
[Music Settings] and press the [ ]
button.
z The screen at left is displayed when
you use a new or recently formatted
memory card. Choose [OK] (either press
the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
press the [ ] button, and wait about four
minutes until the seven types of music
are registered to the card.
z When using a memory card with music
already registered to it, go to step 2.
2
Create the album.
z Follow steps 1 – 3 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (
=
136) to create an
album.
3
Congure background music
settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the desired item, press the
[ ] button, and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an
option (
=
31).
● Albums can include following images captured by the camera.
- Still images
- Digest movies (
=
37), except compressed movies
- Short movie clips with a playback time of two seconds or more
(
=
74), except compressed movies
● Albums cannot be saved unless there is enough space on the
memory card.
● You can also access the Story Highlights home screen by
choosing MENU (
=
31) > [ 2] tab > [ Story Highlights].
● To jump to the next chapter during the preview, drag left, and to
jump to the previous chapter, drag right.
● You can specify the color effect in step 4 by choosing [Change
Color Effect] and pressing the [
] button. To preview how the
album looks with your selected effect applied, choose [Preview
Album Again] on the screen in step 4 after pressing the [
][ ]
buttons to choose a color effect and pressing the [
] button.
● To play saved albums, choose [List of Albums] on the Story
Highlights home screen, press the [
] button, choose a listed
album, and press the [
] button again.
138
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
3
Choose album elements.
z Once you select the elements for your
album and press the [ ] button, your
selected elements are labeled with [ ].
z Press the [
] button after you
are nished selecting still images or
short clips in [Image Selection], dates in
[Date Selection], or people in [Person
Selection].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Preview], and then press
the [ ] button.
4
Choose background music.
z When the screen at left is displayed,
choose [Music Settings]. Add background
music as described in “Adding
Background Music to Albums” (
=
137),
and then press the [ ] button.
5
Choose a color effect.
z On the screen in step 4, choose [Change
Color Effect].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
color effect, and then press the [ ]
button.
6
Save the album.
z Follow step 4 in “Viewing Albums (Story
Highlights)” (
=
136) to save albums.
4
Save the album.
z Follow step 4 in “Viewing Albums (Story
Highlights)” (
=
136) to save albums.
● Once albums are saved, background music cannot be added
later. Background music in albums cannot be removed or
changed.
● Chapters of albums with background music cannot be edited
(
=
135).
● If you prefer not to add background music, set [Add BGM] to [No]
on the screen in step 3.
● To use only background music instead of movie audio, set [Audio
Mixer] to [BGM only] on the screen in step 3.
● To listen to a sample of the background music selected in [Track],
choose [Sample BGM] on the screen in step 3 and press the [
]
button.
Creating Your Own Albums
Still Images
Movies
Create your own albums by choosing desired images.
1
Choose to create a Custom album.
z Following steps 1 – 3 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (
=
136), choose
[Custom] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a selection method.
z Choose [Image Selection], [Date
Selection], or [Person Selection], and
then press the [ ] button.
139
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Combining Short Clips
Still Images
Movies
Combine short clips to create a longer movie.
Note that movies created this way are not included in Story Highlights
albums (
=
136).
1
Access the editing screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Short
Clip Mix] on the [ 2] tab, and then
choose [Merge Clips] (
=
31).
2
Specify clips to combine.
z Drag clips on the top of the screen left or
right, choose a clip to combine, and press
the [ ] button.
z Your selected clip is displayed on the
bottom of the screen.
z To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again.
z Repeat these steps to specify other clips
to combine.
z After you are nished selecting clips,
press the [ ] button.
3
Preview the movie.
z Choose [Preview] and press the [ ]
button.
z After [Loading] is displayed for a few
seconds, a preview of the combined clips
is played.
● You can specify up to 40 les (or 10 movie les) after choosing
[Image Selection]. The second time you create a custom album,
[Select images based on previous settings?] is displayed. To
use previously selected images as the basis, choose [Yes]. The
previous stills or clips are labeled with [
], and multiple images
are displayed.
● Up to 15 dates can be selected if you choose [Date Selection].
● The color effect may not be applied to some images.
140
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
4
Save the movie.
z Choose [Save], and then press the [ ]
button.
z Once the album is saved, [Saved] is
displayed.
5
Play the movie.
z Choose [Play Back Movie] on the
screen in step 1 to view a list of movies
you have created.
z Choose the movie to play and press the
[
] button.
● The next time you combine short clips, [Select images based
on previous settings?] is displayed, and you can choose [Yes]
to display the editing screen with clips arranged in the order you
selected them last time.
● To play the selected clip, move the zoom lever toward [
] on the
screen in step 2.
● To rearrange clips, press the [
] button on the screen in step 2,
select a clip, press the [
] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [
] dial, and then press the [ ] button again.
● To apply a color effect, choose [Change Color Effect] on the
screen in step 3.
● To add background music, choose [Music Settings] on the screen
in step 3 (
=
137).
● The image quality of movies saved is [
].
● Use a fully charged battery pack, if possible.
141
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Available Wireless Features
Using Wi-Fi Features
You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by
connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi.
● Smartphones and Tablets
Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have Wi-
Fi functions. Remote live view shooting is also possible from a
smartphone or tablet.
For convenience in this guide, smartphones, tablets, and other
compatible devices are collectively referred to as “smartphones”.
● Computers
Use software to save camera images to a computer connected via
Wi-Fi.
● Web Services
Add your account information to the camera for CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY online photo service or other Web services to send camera
images to the services. Unsent images on the camera can also be
sent to a computer or Web service via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
● Printers
Print images wirelessly on a PictBridge-compatible printer (supporting
DPS over IP).
● Other Cameras
Send images wirelessly between Wi-Fi-compatible Canon cameras.
Using Bluetooth
®
Features
You can easily pair the camera with a smartphone featuring Bluetooth low
energy technology*. You can also shoot, view, or geotag images by using
your smartphone as a remote control.
* Hereafter referred to as “Bluetooth”.
Wireless Features
Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety
of compatible devices, and use the camera with Web
services
● Before using wireless features, be sure to read “Precautions for
Wireless Features (Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or Others)” (
=
229).
142
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Sending Images to a Bluetooth Enabled
Smartphone
Once you have paired with a smartphone via Bluetooth, simply operate
your smartphone to view and save camera images.
1
Install Camera Connect.
z For Android smartphones, nd Camera
Connect in Google Play and download
and install the app.
z For an iPhone or iPad, nd Camera
Connect in the App Store and download
and install the app.
2
Register a nickname.
z Press the power button.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab, and
then choose [Nickname].
z Press the [
] button to access the
keyboard (
=
32), and then enter a
nickname.
z To return to [Wireless settings] after
pressing the [
] button, press the
[ ] button again.
Sending Images to a Smartphone
There are several ways to connect the camera to a smartphone and send
images.
● Connect via Bluetooth
You can easily connect the camera to a Bluetooth enabled smartphone
by pairing them. This simplies transferring images to a smartphone.
● Connect via NFC (
=
144)
Simply touch an NFC-compatible Android smartphone against the
camera to connect the devices.
● Connect via the Wi-Fi menu (
=
146)
You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connect it
to a computer or other device. Multiple smartphones can be added.
Before connecting to the camera, you must install the free dedicated
Camera Connect app on the smartphone. For details on this application
(supported smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon
website.
● Canon Wi-Fi-compatible camera owners who use CameraWindow
to connect their camera via Wi-Fi to a smartphone should
consider switching to the Camera Connect mobile app.
143
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
7
Transfer images.
z The camera will automatically switch to
Wi-Fi if you choose [Images on camera]
in Camera Connect.
z On an iPhone or iPad, in the device’s
Wi-Fi setting menu, choose the SSID
(network name) displayed on the camera
to establish a connection.
z Use the smartphone to transfer images
from the camera to the smartphone.
z To switch to Bluetooth, disable the Wi-Fi
connection on the smartphone.
● Battery life may be shorter when you use the camera after pairing,
because power is consumed even when the camera is off.
● Before bringing the camera to places where the use of electronic
devices is restricted, set [Bluetooth] to [Off], to avoid having the
camera ready for Bluetooth communication even when it is off.
● Bluetooth connection status is indicated by one of the following
icons.
[
] Connected, [ ] Disconnected
● You can also use the camera to disable Wi-Fi connection
described in step 7.
● To check the information of the smartphone connected via
Bluetooth in [Check/clear connection info], choose MENU
(
=
31) > [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Bluetooth settings].
Choose [Address check] to check the camera’s Bluetooth
address.
3
Prepare for pairing.
z Choose [Bluetooth settings], press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Pairing], and then press the [ ]
button.
z A screen is displayed indicating that the
camera is waiting to connect.
4
Start Camera Connect.
z Activate Bluetooth on the smartphone,
and then start Camera Connect on the
smartphone.
z After the camera is recognized, a camera
selection screen is displayed.
5
Select the camera to connect to.
z Choose the camera nickname.
z Complete the pairing process for the
smartphone.
6
Complete pairing.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK] after the conrmation
message on the camera, and then press
the [
] button.
z Press the [
] button when the screen at
left is displayed.
144
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
2
Establish the connection.
z Make sure the camera is off or in
Shooting mode.
z Touch the N-Mark (
) on the smartphone
with Camera Connect installed against
the camera’s N-Mark.
z The camera screen automatically
changes.
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Camera Connect is started on the
smartphone.
z The devices are connected automatically.
3
Adjust the privacy setting.
z When this screen is displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Yes], and then press the [ ]
button.
z You can now use the smartphone for
remote live view shooting, or to browse or
transfer images on the camera.
Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible
Smartphone
Use an Android smartphone’s NFC to simplify the process of installing
Camera Connect and connecting to the camera.
Operation when devices are initially connected via NFC varies depending
on the camera mode when the devices are touched together.
● If the camera is off or in Shooting mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and send images on the image selection
screen. Once the devices are connected, you can also use your
smartphone for remote live view shooting (
=
164). It’s easy to
reconnect to recent devices, which are listed in the Wi-Fi menu.
● If the camera is in Playback mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and send images from the index display
shown for image selection.
Follow the instructions in the following section for NFC-initiated connection
to a camera that is off or in Shooting mode.
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in Shooting
Mode
1
Install Camera Connect.
z Refer to the smartphone user manual to
check where the N-Mark ( ) is located.
z Activate NFC on the smartphone and
touch the devices’ N-Marks ( ) together
to start Google Play on the smartphone
automatically. Once the Camera Connect
download page is displayed, download
and install the app.
145
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 2 (
=
32).
● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
160).
● To disable NFC connections, choose MENU (
=
31) > [ 4] tab
> [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [NFC] > [Off].
Connecting via NFC in Playback Mode
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
z Touch the smartphone with Camera
Connect installed (
=
144) against the
camera’s N-Mark ( ).
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, and then press the [ ]
button. [ ] is displayed.
z To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
z After you nish choosing images, press
the [ ] button, choose [OK], and
then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
z The images are now sent.
z To end the connection, press the
[
] button, and then press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK].
4
Send an image.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
z [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
z To end the connection, press the
[
] button, choose [OK] on the
conrmation screen (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button. You can
also use the smartphone to end the
connection.
● When using NFC, keep the following points in mind.
- Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone. This
may damage the devices.
- Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize
each other immediately. In this case, try holding the devices
together in slightly different positions. If connection is not
established, keep the devices together until the camera screen
is updated.
- If you attempt connection when the camera is off, a message
may be displayed on the smartphone reminding you to turn on
the camera. If so, turn the camera on and touch the devices
together again.
- Do not place other objects between the camera and
smartphone. Also, note that camera or smartphone covers or
similar accessories may block communication.
● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 3. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 3.
● Privacy settings for registered smartphones can be changed later,
as needed (
=
167).
146
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
4
Choose [Add a Device].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
z The camera SSID and password are
displayed.
5
Connect the smartphone to the
network.
z In the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
z In the password eld, enter the password
displayed on the camera.
6
Start Camera Connect.
z Start Camera Connect on the
smartphone.
7
Select the camera to connect to.
z On the camera selection screen
displayed on the smartphone, choose the
camera to begin pairing.
● If during connection a message on the camera requests you
to enter the nickname, enter it as described in “On-Screen
Keyboard” (
=
32).
● The camera does not keep a record of smartphones you connect
to via NFC in Playback mode.
● You can preset images to transfer at your desired size (
=
162).
Connecting to a Smartphone via the Wi-Fi
Menu
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (
=
147).
1
Install Camera Connect.
z For Android smartphones, nd Camera
Connect in Google Play and download
and install the app.
z For an iPhone or iPad, nd Camera
Connect in the App Store and download
and install the app.
2
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [ ] button.
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
147
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
31) > [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Target History] > [Off].
● To connect without entering a password in step 5, choose MENU
(
=
31) > [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Password] > [Off]. [Password] is no longer displayed on the SSID
screen (in step 4).
● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
160).
● Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
(
=
127), you can automatically reconnect to a previous
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
Using Another Access Point
When connecting the camera to a smartphone through the Wi-Fi menu,
you can also use an existing access point.
1
Prepare for the connection.
z Access the [Waiting to connect] screen
by following steps 1 – 4 in “Connecting
to a Smartphone via the Wi-Fi Menu”
(
=
146).
2
Connect the smartphone to the
access point.
8
Adjust the privacy setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
[
] button.
z You can now use the smartphone for
remote live view shooting, or to browse or
transfer images on the camera.
9
Send an image.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [
]
button.
z [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
z To end the connection, press the [ ]
button, choose [OK] on the conrmation
screen (either press the [
][ ] buttons or
turn the [
] dial), and then press the [ ]
button. You can also use the smartphone
to end the connection.
● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 8. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 8.
● Privacy settings for registered smartphones can be changed later,
as needed (
=
167).
148
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
following step 4 in “Connecting to a Smartphone via the Wi-Fi Menu”
(
=
146).
● To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose
[Camera Access Point Mode].
● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the
procedure in “Using Another Access Point” (
=
147) from step 4.
3
Choose [Switch Network].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Switch Network], and then
press the [ ] button.
z A list of detected access points is
displayed.
4
Connect to the access point and
choose the smartphone.
z For WPS-compatible access points,
connect to the access point as described
in steps 5 – 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible
Access Points” (
=
151).
z For non-WPS access points, follow steps
2 – 4 in “Connecting to Listed Access
Points” (
=
153) to connect to the
access point.
5
Select the camera to connect to.
z On the camera selection screen
displayed on the smartphone, choose the
camera to begin pairing.
6
Congure the privacy settings and
send images.
z Follow steps 8 – 9 in “Connecting to
a Smartphone via the Wi-Fi Menu”
(
=
146) to congure the privacy
settings and send images.
149
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
● To uninstall (remove) the software in Windows, select [Start]
menu > [All Programs] > [Canon Utilities], and then choose the
software for uninstallation.
Conguring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only)
On a computer running Windows, congure the following settings before
connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly.
1
Conrm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
z For instructions on checking your network
connection, refer to the computer user
manual.
2
Congure the setting.
z Click in the following order: [Start] menu
> [All Programs] > [Canon Utilities] >
[CameraWindow] > [Wi-Fi connection
setup].
z In the application that opens, follow the
on-screen instructions and congure the
setting.
Saving Images to a Computer
Preparing to Register a Computer
For details on computers that you can connect the camera to via Wi-
Fi, system requirements, and other compatibility information (including
support in new operating systems), visit the Canon website.
● Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.
● Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version)
require a separate download and installation of Windows Media
Feature Pack.
For details, check the following website.
http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730
Installing CameraWindow
1
Download the software.
z Visit the following site from a computer
connected to the Internet.
http://www.canon.com/icpd/
z Choose your country or region, and
then follow the instructions displayed to
prepare for downloading.
2
Follow the instructions displayed.
z Double-click the downloaded le to install
it.
● Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and
access fees must be paid separately.
150
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
● Password (encryption key / network key)
The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission. Also
called the “encryption key” or “network key”.
● Key index (transmit key)
The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data
encryption. Use “1” as the setting.
● If system administrator status is needed to adjust network
settings, contact the system administrator for details.
● These settings are very important for network security. Exercise
adequate caution when changing these settings.
● For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on
checking settings, refer to the access point user manual.
● A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for
connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal
Wi-Fi function is called a “Wi-Fi router”.
● This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access
points”.
● If you use MAC address ltering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure
to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can
check your camera’s MAC address by choosing MENU (
=
31)
> [
4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Check MAC
Address].
● The following Windows settings are congured when you run the
utility in step 2.
- Turn on media streaming.
This will enable the camera to see (nd) the computer to access
via Wi-Fi.
- Turn on network discovery.
This will enable the computer to see (nd) the camera.
- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).
This allows you to check the network connection status.
- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP).
This will enable network devices to detect each other
automatically.
● Some security software may prevent you from completing the
settings as described here. Check the settings of your security
software.
Saving Images to a Connected Computer
Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows.
Also refer to the access point user manual.
Conrming Access Point Compatibility
Conrm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi
standards in “Interface” (
=
225).
Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point
supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS,
=
151) or not (
=
153). For
non-WPS access points, check the following information.
● Network name (SSID/ESSID)
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Also called the
“access point name” or “network name”.
● Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method /
encryption mode)
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. Check
which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK
(TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system
authentication), or no security.
151
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
5
Choose [Connect with WPS].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Connect with WPS], and
then press the [ ] button.
6
Choose [WPS (PBC mode)].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [WPS (PBC mode)], and
then press the [ ] button.
7
Establish the connection.
z On the access point, hold down the WPS
connection button for a few seconds.
z On the camera, press the [
] button to
go to the next step.
z The camera connects to the access point
and lists devices connected to it on the
[Select a Device] screen.
8
Choose the target device.
z Choose the target device name (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over
Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Conguration (PBC) Method or PIN
Method to set up an access point that supports WPS.
1
Conrm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
z For instructions on checking the
connection, refer to the device and
access point user manuals.
2
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [ ] button.
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
4
Choose [Add a Device].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
152
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
31) > [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Target History] > [Off].
● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 2 (
=
168).
● When the camera is connected to a computer, the camera screen
is blank.
● To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera.
● The PIN code displayed when you choose [WPS (PIN mode)]
in step 6 is to be set in the access point. Choose a device in the
[Select a Device] screen. For further details, refer to the user
manual included with your access point.
● Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
(
=
127), you can automatically reconnect to a previous
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
9
Install a driver (rst Windows
connection only).
z When this screen is displayed on the
camera, click the Start menu on the
computer, click [Control Panel], and then
click [Add a device].
z Double-click the connected camera icon.
z Driver installation will begin.
z After driver installation is complete, and
the camera and computer connection
is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be
displayed. Nothing will be displayed on
the camera screen.
10
Display CameraWindow.
z Windows: Access CameraWindow by
clicking [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera].
11
Import images.
z Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
z Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
z Click [OK] in the screen that is displayed
after image import is complete.
z To view images you save to a computer,
use preinstalled or commonly available
software compatible with images
captured by the camera.
153
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
● To determine the access point password, check on the access
point itself or refer to the user manual.
● If no access points are detected even after you choose [Refresh]
in step 2 to update the list, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2
to complete access point settings manually. Follow on-screen
instructions and enter an SSID, security settings, and a password.
● When you use an access point that you have already connected
to for connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the
password in step 3. To use the same password, choose [Next]
(either press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial) and press
the [
] button.
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
following step 4 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (
=
151).
● To connect to a device via an access point, conrm that the target
device is already connected to the access point, and then follow the
procedure from step 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(
=
151).
● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then either follow
the procedure in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (
=
151)
from step 5 or the procedure in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(
=
153) from step 2.
Connecting to Listed Access Points
1
View the listed access points.
z View the listed networks (access points)
as described in steps 1 – 4 of “Using
WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(
=
151).
2
Choose an access point.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a network (access point),
and then press the [ ] button.
3
Enter the access point password.
z Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the password
(
=
32).
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Next], and then press the
[ ] button.
4
Choose [Auto].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Auto], and then press the
[ ] button.
z To save images to a connected computer,
follow the procedure from step 8 in
“Using WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(
=
151).
154
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
Link the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY by adding CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera. Note
that you will need to enter an email address used on your computer or
smartphone to receive a notication message for completing linkage
settings.
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [ ] button.
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Accept the agreement to enter an
email address.
z Read the agreement displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [I Agree], and then press the [
]
button.
Sending Images to a Registered Web
Service
Registering Web Services
Use a smartphone or computer to add your Web services to the camera.
● A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and other Web services.
● Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser
(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and
version information.
● For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon.
com/cig/).
● To use Web services other than CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, you must
have an account with them. For further details, check the websites for
each Web service you want to register.
● Separate ISP connection and access point fees may apply.
● CANON iMAGE GATEWAY also provides user guides for
downloading.
155
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
7
Check for the notication message.
z Once information has been sent to
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, you will
receive a notication message at the
email address entered in step 5.
z Press the [ ] button on the next screen,
which indicates that notication has been
sent.
z [ ] now changes to [ ].
8
Access the page in the notication
message and complete camera link
settings.
z From a computer or smartphone,
access the page linked in the notication
message.
z Follow the instructions to complete the
settings on the camera link settings page.
9
Complete CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
settings on the camera.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z [ ] (
=
162) and CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY are now added as
destinations.
z You can add other Web services,
as needed. In this case, follow the
instructions from step 2 in “Registering
Other Web Services” (
=
156).
4
Establish a connection with an
access point.
z Connect to the access point as described
in steps 5 – 7 in “Using WPS-Compatible
Access Points” (
=
151) or in steps 2 – 4
in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(
=
153).
5
Enter your email address.
z Once the camera is connected to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point, a
screen is displayed for entering an email
address.
z Enter your email address, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Next], and then press the [ ]
button.
6
Enter a four-digit number.
z Enter a four-digit number of your choice,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Next], and then press the
[ ] button.
z You will need this four-digit number later
when setting up linkage with CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY in step 8.
156
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
3
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z The Web service settings are now
updated.
● If any congured settings change, follow these steps again to
update the camera settings.
Uploading Images to Web Services
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose the destination.
z Choose the icon of the Web service to
connect to (either press the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button.
z If multiple recipients or sharing options
are used with a Web service, choose the
desired item on the [Select Recipient]
screen (either press the [
][ ] buttons
or turn the [
] dial), and then press the
[ ] button.
● Make sure initially that your computer or smartphone mail
application is not congured to block email from relevant domains,
which may prevent you from receiving the notication message.
● You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 1 (
=
168).
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the menu. Press
the [
][ ] buttons to access the device selection screen and then
congure the setting.
● Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
(
=
127), you can automatically reconnect to a previous
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
Registering Other Web Services
You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the
camera.
1
Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and access the camera link settings
page.
z From a computer or smartphone, access
http://www.canon.com/cig/ to visit
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
2
Congure the Web service you want
to use.
z On the computer or smartphone, display
the Web service settings screen.
z Follow the on-screen instructions to
complete settings for Web services you
want to use.
157
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Printing Images Wirelessly from a
Connected Printer
Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (
=
147).
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [Add a Device].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
z The camera SSID and password are
displayed.
3
Send an image.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
z When uploading to YouTube, read the
terms of service, choose [I Agree], and
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ] button to return to the
playback screen once [OK] is displayed
after the image is sent.
● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
● You can also send multiple images at once, resize images, and
add comments before sending (
=
160).
● To view images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY on a
smartphone, try the dedicated Canon Online Photo Album app.
Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for
iPhones or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from
Google Play.
158
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
31) > [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Target History] > [Off].
● To connect without entering a password in step 4, choose MENU
(
=
31) > [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Password] > [Off]. [Password] is no longer displayed on the SSID
screen (in step 3).
● To use another access point, follow steps 3 – 4 in “Using Another
Access Point” (
=
147).
● Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
(
=
127), you can automatically reconnect to a previous
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
4
Connect the printer to the network.
z In the printer’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
z In the password eld, enter the password
displayed on the camera.
5
Choose the printer.
z Choose the printer name (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
6
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
7
Access the printing screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu (either press the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and then
press the [ ] button again.
8
Print the image.
z For detailed printing instructions, see
“Printing Images” (
=
191).
z To end the connection, press the [ ]
button, choose [OK] on the disconnection
conrmation screen (either press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
159
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
4
Send an image.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
z [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
z To end the connection, press the
[
] button, choose [OK] on the
conrmation screen (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
31) > [ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Target History] > [Off].
● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
160,
=
162).
● Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
(
=
127), you can automatically reconnect to a previous
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
Sending Images to Another Camera
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send and receive images between
them as follows.
● Only Wi-Fi compatible Canon cameras can be connected via Wi-Fi.
You cannot connect to a Canon camera unless it is Wi-Fi compatible,
even if it supports Eye-Fi cards.
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [Add a Device].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Also follow steps 1 – 3 on the target
camera.
z Camera connection information will be
added when [Start connection on target
camera] is displayed on both camera
screens.
160
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, and then press the [ ]
button. [ ] is displayed.
z To cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
z After you nish choosing images, press
the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
3
Send the images.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
● You can also choose images in step 2 by moving the zoom
lever twice toward [
] to access single-image display and then
pressing the [
][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial.
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
z Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (
=
160), choose [Select
Range] and press the [ ] button.
Image Sending Options
You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image
recording pixel setting (size) before sending. Some Web services also
enable you to annotate the images you send.
Sending Multiple Images
1
Choose [Select and send].
z On the image transfer screen, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [Select and
send], and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a selection method.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a selection method.
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
z Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (
=
160), choose [Select] and
press the [
] button.
161
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
● In step 1, [Favorite Images] is not available unless you have
tagged images as favorites.
Notes on Sending Images
● Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take
a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera
battery level.
● Web services may limit the number of images or length of movies you
can send.
● For movies that you do not compress (
=
135), a separate,
compressed le is sent instead of the original le. Note that this may
delay transmission, and the le cannot be sent unless there is enough
space for it on the memory card.
● When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image
quality varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the
smartphone user manual.
● On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following
icons.
[ ] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak
● Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending
images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server.
2
Choose images.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
122) to specify images.
z To include movies, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [Incl.
Movies], and then press the [ ] button to
mark the option as selected ( ).
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
3
Send the images.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
Sending Favorite Images
Send only images tagged as favorites (
=
126).
1
Choose [Favorite Images].
z Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (
=
160), choose [Favorite
Images] and press the [ ] button.
z An image selection screen for favorites is
displayed. If you prefer not to include an
image, choose the image and press the
[ ] button to remove [ ].
z After you nish choosing images, press
the [ ] button, choose [OK], and
then press the [
] button.
2
Send the images.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
162
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Sending Images Automatically (Image
Sync)
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can
be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.
Initial Preparations
Preparing the Camera
Register [ ] as the destination. On the destination computer, you will
install and congure Image Transfer Utility, free software compatible with
Image Sync.
1
Add [ ] as a destination.
z Add [ ] as a destination, as described in
“Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY”
(
=
154).
z To include a Web service as the
destination, log in to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY (
=
154), select your camera
model, access the Web service settings
screen, and choose the destination
Web service in Image Sync settings.
For details, refer to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY Help.
2
Choose the type of images to send
(only when sending movies with
images).
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab, and
then choose [Wi-Fi Settings] (
=
31).
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Image Sync], and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [Stills/Movies].
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels
(Image Size)
On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons, and then press the [ ] button. On the screen displayed, choose
the recording pixel setting (image size) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
● To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.
● Choosing [ ] will resize images that are larger than the selected size
before sending.
● Movies cannot be resized.
● Image size can also be congured in MENU (
=
31) > [ 4] tab
> [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Resize for Sending].
Adding Comments
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send to
email recipients or social networking services. The number of characters
and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the Web
service.
1
Access the screen for adding
comments.
z On the image transfer screen, choose
[ ] by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
2
Add a comment (=
32).
3
Send the image.
● When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent.
● You can also annotate multiple images before sending them. The
same comment is added to all images sent together.
163
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Sending Images
Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.
If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.
Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer
and save the images.
1
Send images.
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Uploading Images
to Web Services” (
=
156) and choose
[ ].
z Sent images are labeled with a [ ] icon.
2
Save the images to the computer.
z Images are automatically saved to the
computer when you turn it on.
z Images are automatically sent to Web
services from the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server, even if the computer
is off.
● When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery
pack.
● Even if images were imported to the computer through a different
method, any images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY will be sent to the computer.
● Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same
network as the camera, because images are sent via the access
point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images
stored on the computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so
the computer must be connected to the Internet.
Preparing the Computer
Install and congure the software on the destination computer.
1
Install Image Transfer Utility.
z Install Image Transfer Utility on a
computer connected to the Internet
by following steps 1 – 2 of “Installing
CameraWindow” (
=
149).
z Image Transfer Utility can also be
downloaded from the Image Sync
settings page of CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY (
=
162).
2
Register the camera.
z Windows: In the taskbar, right-click [ ],
and then click [Add new camera].
z Mac OS: In the menu bar, click [ ], and
then click [Add new camera].
z A list of cameras linked to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose
the camera to send images from.
z Once the camera is registered and the
computer is ready to receive images, the
icon changes to [
].
164
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Using a Smartphone to View Camera
Images and Control the Camera
You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app Camera
Connect.
● Browse images on the camera and save them to the smartphone
● Geotag images as you shoot (
=
164)
● Control the camera remotely from a smartphone (
=
165)
● Privacy settings must be congured in advance to allow image
viewing on the smartphone (
=
144,
=
146,
=
167).
Geotagging Images When You Shoot
Still images and movies you shoot can be geotagged using GPS
information (such as latitude, longitude, and elevation) from a Bluetooth
enabled smartphone. You can review the recorded GPS information on
the camera (
=
113). Using the software (
=
189), you can also view
the locations on a map, with the still images and movies shown next to
them.
1
Pair the camera and smartphone via
Bluetooth (=
142).
2
Choose [GPS settings].
z Press the [ ] button, choose [GPS
settings] on the [ 4] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a Smartphone
By installing the Canon Online Photo Album (Canon OPA) app, you can
use your smartphone to view and download images sent via Image Sync
while they are stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
server.
In preparation, enable smartphone access as follows.
● Make sure you have completed the settings described in “Preparing
the Computer” (
=
163).
● Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for iPhones
or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from Google Play.
● Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY (
=
154), select your camera
model, access the Web service settings screen, and enable viewing
and downloading from a smartphone in the Image Sync settings. For
details, refer to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY Help.
● Once images stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server have been deleted, they can no longer be
viewed.
● Images you sent before enabling smartphone viewing and
downloading in Image Sync settings cannot be accessed this way.
● For Canon Online Photo Album instructions, refer to Canon
Online Photo Album Help.
165
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Controlling the Camera Remotely from a
Smartphone
Controlling the Camera via Wi-Fi
You can take shots or record movies as you view a shooting screen on
your smartphone.
● Privacy settings must be congured in advance to allow viewing
of all images from the smartphone (
=
146).
1
Secure the camera.
z Keep the camera still by mounting it on a
tripod or taking other measures.
2
Connect the camera and
smartphone (
=
146).
z In the privacy settings, choose [Yes].
3
Choose remote live view shooting.
z In Camera Connect on the smartphone,
choose [Remote live view shooting].
z Once the camera is ready for remote
live view shooting, a live image from the
camera is displayed on the smartphone.
z At this time, a message is displayed on
the camera, and all operations except
pressing the power button are disabled.
4
Shoot.
z Use the smartphone to shoot.
3
Congure the setting.
z Choose [GPS via Mobile], and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Enable].
4
Shoot.
z The still images and movies you shoot
are now geotagged using smartphone
GPS information, which you can check as
described in “GPS Information Display”
(
=
113).
z Next time, after starting Camera Connect
on your smartphone, make sure the
camera and smartphone are connected
via Bluetooth before shooting.
● Images are not geotagged this way unless Camera Connect is
running.
● The GPS information added to your movie is acquired initially,
when you start shooting.
● GPS information cannot be updated unless Wi-Fi is off.
● The GPS information added to images in remote live view
shooting is acquired initially, when you switch to a Wi-Fi
connection.
● Images may not be geotagged if you connect via NFC or
Bluetooth when the camera is off.
● Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing
these images with others, as when posting images online where
many others can view them.
● GPS acquisition status is indicated by one of the following icons.
[
] Acquiring, [ ] Not acquiring
● To check the GPS information acquired from the smartphone,
choose MENU (
=
31) > [ 4] tab > [GPS settings] > [GPS
information display].
166
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
4
Shoot and switch images.
z Use the smartphone to shoot in Shooting
mode and switch images in Playback
mode.
● [Bluetooth remote controller] is not available when connected via
Wi-Fi.
● You can check the Bluetooth connection status by referring to the
icon on the screen (
=
142).
● Focusing may take longer.
● Image display or shutter release may be delayed, depending on
the connection status.
● Any rough subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the
connection environment will not affect recorded images.
● Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the
smartphone to browse and transfer images from the camera.
Controlling the Camera via Bluetooth
You can use a Bluetooth enabled smartphone for remote shooting and
switching of image display. This is convenient if you want to connect
quickly while shooting, or if you will control playback while connected to a
TV.
1
Prepare the camera.
z Set the shooting mode and the shooting
functions on the camera.
z Keep the camera still by mounting it on
a tripod or taking other measures when
shooting.
2
Connect the camera and
smartphone (
=
142).
z Make sure that the Bluetooth connection
has been established.
3
Choose Bluetooth remote controller.
z In Camera Connect on the smartphone,
choose [Bluetooth remote controller].
z The smartphone screen changes to a
screen for remote control via Bluetooth.
167
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Congurable Items
Connection
Web
Services
[Change Device Nickname]
(
=
167)
O O O O
–
[View Settings] (=
168)
–
O
– – –
[Erase Connection Info] (=
167)
O O O O
–
O
: Congurable
–
: Not congurable
Changing a Device Nickname
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on
the camera.
z Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (
=
167), choose [Change
Device Nickname] and press the [ ]
button.
z Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard (
=
32), and then enter a
new nickname.
Erasing Connection Information
Erase connection information (information about devices that you have
connected to) as follows.
z Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (
=
167), choose [Erase
Connection Info] and press the [
]
button.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
z The connection information will be
erased.
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings
Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.
Editing Connection Information
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose
a device to edit.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the icon of a
device to edit, and then press the [ ]
button.
2
Choose [Edit a Device].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Edit a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose the device to edit.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the device to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
4
Choose the item to edit.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the item to edit, and then
press the [
] button.
z The items you can change depend on the
device or service.
168
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
3
Change the nickname.
z Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard (
=
32), and then enter a
nickname.
● A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with
a symbol or space. Press the [
] button and enter a different
nickname.
● You can also change the nickname from the [Device Nickname]
screen displayed when you rst use Wi-Fi. In this case, select the
text box, press the [
] button to access the keyboard, and then
enter a new nickname.
Specifying Images Viewable from Smartphones
Specify whether all images on the camera’s memory card can be viewed
from smartphones connected to the camera.
z Choose [View Settings] in step 4
of “Editing Connection Information”
(
=
167) and choose the desired option.
● For remote live view shooting, choose [On].
Changing the Camera Nickname
Change the camera nickname (displayed on connected devices) as
desired.
1
Choose [Wireless settings].
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab
(
=
31).
2
Choose [Nickname].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Nickname], and then
press the [ ] button.
169
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Clearing Information of Devices Paired via
Bluetooth
Before pairing with a different smartphone, clear the information about any
connected smartphones.
1
Choose [Bluetooth settings].
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[ 4] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Bluetooth
settings].
2
Choose [Check/clear connection
info].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Check/clear connection
info], and then press the [ ] button.
3
Clear the information.
z On the [Check/clear connection info]
screen, press the [ ] button.
z After [Clear information about devices
you have connected to] is displayed,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
4
Clear the camera information.
z In the Bluetooth setting menu on the
smartphone, clear the camera information
registered on the smartphone.
Returning the Wireless Settings to Default
Return the wireless settings to default if you transfer ownership of the
camera to another person, or dispose of it.
Resetting the wireless settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be
sure that you want to reset all wireless settings before using this option.
1
Choose [Wireless settings].
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ 4] tab
(
=
31).
2
Choose [Reset Settings].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Reset Settings], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Restore the default settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
z The wireless settings are now reset.
● To reset settings other than wireless settings to defaults, choose
[Reset camera] on the [
5] tab (
=
177).
170
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
MENU (
=
31) settings on the [ 1], [ 2], [ 3], [ 4], and [ 5] tabs
can be congured. Customize commonly used functions as desired, for
greater convenience.
Date-Based Image Storage
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.
z Choose [Create Folder] on the [
1] tab,
and then choose [Daily].
z Images will now be saved in folders
created on the shooting date.
File Numbering
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999)
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change
how the camera assigns le numbers.
z Choose [File Numbering] on the [
1] tab,
and then choose the desired option.
Continuous
Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th
shot is taken/saved) even if you switch memory cards.
Auto Reset
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch memory
cards, or when a new folder is created.
Setting Menu
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for
greater convenience
171
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
● Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes le
management information on the card and does not erase the data
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards,
take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by
physically destroying cards.
● The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be
less than the advertised capacity.
Low-Level Formatting
Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing
is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly
stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-
level formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take
other steps to back them up.
z On the screen in step 2 of “Formatting
Memory Cards” (
=
171), press the [ ]
button to choose [Low Level Format]. A
[ ] icon is displayed.
z Follow step 2 in “Formatting Memory
Cards” (
=
171) to continue with the
formatting process.
● Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory
Cards” (
=
171), because data is erased from all storage regions
of the memory card.
● You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing
[Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card
can be used normally.
● Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be
numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images
on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001,
use an empty (or formatted,
=
171) memory card.
Formatting Memory Cards
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device,
you should format the card with this camera.
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy
images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back
them up.
1
Access the [Format] screen.
z Choose [Format] on the [ 1] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [OK].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
3
Format the memory card.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK] after the conrmation
message, and then press the [ ] button
to start formatting.
z When formatting is nished, [Memory
card formatting complete] is displayed.
Press the [
] button.
172
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Resetting the Electronic Level
Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows. Note that this is
not possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level.
z Choose [Electronic level] on the [
1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose [Reset], and then press the [ ]
button.
z Choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
Switching the Color of Screen Information
Still Images
Movies
Information displayed on the screen and menus can be changed to a color
suitable for shooting under low-light conditions. Enabling this setting is
useful in modes such as [
] (
=
67).
z Choose [Night Display] on the [
2] tab,
and then choose [On] (
=
31).
z To restore the original display, choose
[Off].
● You can also return the setting to [Off] by holding down the [ ]
button for at least one second.
Changing the Video System
Set the video system of any television used for display. This setting
determines the image quality (frame rate) available for movies.
z Choose [Video system] on the [
1] tab,
and then choose an option.
Electronic Level Calibration
Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the
camera.
For greater calibration accuracy, display grid lines (
=
103) to help you
level the camera in advance.
1
Make sure the camera is level.
z Place the camera on a at surface, such
as a table.
2
Calibrate the electronic level.
z Choose [Electronic level] on the [ 1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z To adjust left/right tilt, choose [Horizontal
Roll Calibration], and to adjust forward/
backward tilt, choose [Vertical Pitch
Calibration], followed by the [
] button. A
conrmation message is displayed.
z Choose [OK], and then press the [
]
button.
173
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Power-Saving Adjustment
Adjust the timing of automatic deactivation of the camera, screen, and
viewnder (Auto Power Down, Display Off, and Viewnder Off (
=
27)).
z Choose [Power Saving] on the [
2] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose an item, press the [ ] button,
and then press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to congure the setting.
● [Display Off] and [Auto Power Down] cannot be congured when
Eco Mode (
=
173) is set to [On].
Screen Brightness
Screen and viewnder brightness can be set separately. Before
adjustment, make sure the display to adjust is activated.
z Choose [ 2] tab > [Disp. Brightness],
press the [ ] button, and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
adjust the brightness.
● For maximum brightness, press and hold the [ ] button for at
least one second. (This will override the [Disp. Brightness] setting
on the [
2] tab.) To restore the original brightness, press and
hold the [
] button again for at least one second or restart the
camera.
Using Eco Mode
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode.
When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce
battery consumption.
1
Congure the setting.
z Choose [Eco Mode] on the [ 2] tab, and
then choose [On].
z [ ] is now shown on the shooting
screen (
=
204).
z The screen darkens when the camera
is not used for approximately two
seconds; approximately ten seconds
after darkening, the screen turns off.
The camera turns off after approximately
three minutes of inactivity.
2
Shoot.
z To activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is off but the
lens is still out, press the shutter button
halfway.
174
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
3
Switch to the destination time zone.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
z [ ] is now shown on [Time Zone] and
shooting screens (
=
204).
● Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (
=
22) will
automatically update your [
Home] time and date.
Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
z Choose [Date/Time] on the [
2] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item, and then adjust the setting, either
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial.
Lens Retraction Timing
The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press
the [ ] button in Shooting mode (
=
26). To have the lens retracted
immediately after you press the [ ] button, set the retraction timing to
[0 sec.].
z Choose [Lens Retraction] on the [
2] tab,
and then choose [0 sec.].
World Clock
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when
you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to
that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the
Date/Time setting manually.
1
Specify your home time zone.
z Choose [Time Zone] on the [ 2] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
z When conguring this setting for the rst
time, make sure [ Home] is selected,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose your
home time zone.
z To set daylight saving time (1 hour
ahead), choose [ ] by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial,
and then choose [ ] by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Specify your destination.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
destination.
z If necessary, specify daylight saving time
as in step 1.
z Press the [
] button.
175
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Adjusting the Volume
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.
z Choose [Volume] on the [
3] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, press the [ ]
button, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons
to adjust the volume.
Customizing Sounds
Customize camera operating sounds as follows.
z Choose [Sound Options] on the [
3] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose an option, press the
[ ] button, and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons to change the sound.
● The shutter sound in digest movies recorded in [ ] mode
(
=
37) cannot be changed.
Start-Up Screen
Customize the start-up screen shown after you turn the camera on as
follows.
z Choose [Start-up Image] on the [
1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option.
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
z Choose [Language
] on the [ 3] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
● You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by
pressing and holding the [
] button and immediately pressing
the [
] button.
Silencing Camera Operations
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.
z Choose [Mute] on the [
3] tab, and then
choose [Enable].
● Operation can also be silenced by holding down the [ ]
button as you turn the camera on.
● Sound is not played during movies (
=
111) if you mute camera
sounds. To restore sound during movies, press the [
] button or
drag up across the screen. Adjust volume as needed by pressing
the [
][ ] buttons or by dragging up or down quickly.
176
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Metric / Non-Metric Display
Change the unit of measurement shown in the zoom bar (
=
35), the
MF indicator (
=
89), and elsewhere from m/cm to ft/in as needed.
z Choose [Units] on the [
4] tab, and then
choose [ft/in].
Checking Certication Logos
Some logos for certication requirements met by the camera can be
viewed on the screen. Other certication logos are printed in this guide, on
the camera packaging, or on the camera body.
z Choose [Certication Logo Display] on
the [
5] tab, and then press the [ ]
button.
Hiding Hints and Tips
Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose Quick Set menu
(
=
30) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information.
z Choose [Hints & Tips] on the [
3] tab,
and then choose [Off].
Listing Shooting Modes by Icon
List shooting modes on the selection screen by icon only, without mode
names, for faster selection.
z Choose [Mode icon size/info] on the [
3]
tab, and then choose [Small, no info].
Adjusting the Touch-Screen Panel
Sensitivity of the touch-screen panel can be increased to respond to a
lighter touch, or you can disable touch control.
z Choose [
4] tab > [Touch Operation], and
then choose the desired option.
z To increase touch-screen panel
sensitivity, choose [Sensitive], and to
disable touch control, choose [Disable].
177
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Adjusting Other Settings
The following settings can also be adjusted.
● [Wi-Fi connect’n] ([
4] tab) (
=
141)
● [Wireless settings] ([ 4] tab) (
=
141)
● [GPS settings] ([ 4] tab) (
=
164)
● [Custom shooting mode (C1, C2)] ([
5] tab) (
=
108)
Restoring Default Camera Settings
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera
settings.
Restoring All Camera Defaults
1
Access the [Basic settings] screen.
z Choose [Reset camera] on the [ 5] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose [Basic settings], and then press
the [ ] button.
2
Restore default settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
z All camera defaults are now restored.
Setting Copyright Information to Record in
Images
To record the author’s name and copyright details in images, set this
information beforehand as follows.
z Choose [Copyright Info] on the [
5] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Enter Author’s Name] or
[Enter Copyright Details]. Press the [ ]
button to access the keyboard, and enter
the name (
=
32).
z Press the [ ] button. When [Accept
changes?] is displayed, choose [Yes]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
z The information set here will now be
recorded in images.
● To check the information entered, choose [Display Copyright Info]
on the screen above, and then press the [
] button.
Deleting All Copyright Information
You can delete both the author’s name and copyright details at the same
time as follows.
z Follow the steps in “Setting Copyright
Information to Record in Images”
(
=
177) and choose [Delete Copyright
Info].
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted.
178
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
3
Restore default settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Default function settings are now
restored.
● The following functions are not restored to default settings.
- [
1] tab setting [Video system] (
=
172)
- [
2] tab settings [Time Zone] (
=
174) and [Date/Time]
(
=
174)
- [
3] tab setting [Language ] (
=
175)
- Shooting mode (
=
56)
- Exposure compensation (
=
78) setting
- Wireless settings (
=
141)
- Calibrated value for the electronic level (
=
172)
- Copyright information (
=
177)
- Face ID information (
=
45)
Restoring Defaults for Individual Functions
Settings for the following functions can be restored to defaults individually.
● User settings for custom shooting modes
● Copyright information
● Calibrated value for the electronic level
● Face ID information
● Wireless settings
1
Access the [Other settings] screen.
z Choose [Reset camera] on the [ 5] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Other settings], and then
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose the function to reset.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the function to reset, and
then press the [ ] button.
179
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used
with genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents
such as re, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon
accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please
note that any repairs your Canon product may require as a result of such
malfunction are not covered under warranty and will incur a fee.
Accessories
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon
accessories and other compatible accessories sold
separately
180
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
System Map
*1 Also available for purchase separately.
*2 A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-600PCU).
*3 Use a commercially available cable no longer than 2.5 m (8.2 ft.).
*4 The following accessories are also supported: Speedlite 580EX II, 580EX,
430EX, 320EX, 270EX, and 220EX, Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2 and ST-E3-RT,
Speedlite Bracket SB-E2, and Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3.
*5 Requires Remote Controller Adapter RA-E3.
Memory Card Card Reader Computer
Cables
HDMI Cable
(camera end: Type D)*
3
Flash Units
PictBridge-Compatible Printers
Cases
Other Accessories
Power
Lens Accessories
Neck Strap
Battery Pack
NB-13L*
1
Compact Power Adapter
CA-DC30/CA-DC30E
TV/Video
System
Remote Switch
RS-60E3
Timer Remote
Controller
TC-80N3*
5
Waterproof Case
WP-DC56
Included Accessories
Battery Charger
CB-2LH/CB-2LHE*
1
USB Cable
(camera end: Micro-B)*
2
Lens Hood
LH-DC110 (with cap)
Speedlite*
4
600EX II-RT/600EX-RT/600EX/430EX III-RT/
430EX III/430EX II/270EX II
Strap Adapter
Lens Cap
Lens Cap Cord
181
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
● The battery charger and compact power adapter can be used in
areas with 100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz).
● For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially
available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer
designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.
Flash Units
Speedlite 600EX II-RT/600EX-RT/
600EX/430EX III-RT/430EX III/
430EX II/270EX II
z Shoe-mounted ash unit that enables
many styles of ash photography.
Speedlite 580EX II, 580EX, 430EX,
320EX, 270EX, and 220EX are also
supported.
Speedlite Bracket SB-E2
z Prevents unnatural shadows next to
subjects during vertical shooting. Includes
Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3.
Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2/ST-E3-RT
z Enables wireless control of slave
Speedlite ash units (except Speedlite
220EX/270EX).
Optional Accessories
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that
availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be
available.
Power Supplies
Battery Pack NB-13L
z Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
z Charger for Battery Pack NB-13L
● The message [Battery communication error] is displayed if you
use a non-genuine Canon battery pack, and user response is
required. Note that Canon shall not be liable for any damages
resulting from accidents, such as malfunction or re, that occur
due to use of non-genuine Canon battery packs.
● The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can
attach to know the charge status at a glance. Attach the cover so
that ▲ is visible on a charged battery pack, and attach it so that
▲ is not visible on an uncharged battery pack.
Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/
CA-DC30E
z Insert the included battery pack into the
camera for charging. Interface Cable
IFC-600PCU (sold separately) is required
to connect the adapter to the camera.
182
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Printers
Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible
Printers
z Even without using a computer, you can
print images by connecting the camera
directly to a printer.
For details, visit your nearest Canon
retailer.
Photo and Movie Storage
Connect Station CS100
z A media hub for storing camera images,
viewing on a connected TV, printing
wirelessly on a Wi-Fi-compatible printer,
sharing over the Internet, and more.
Other Accessories
Waterproof Case WP-DC56
z For underwater photography at depths of
up to 40 meters (130 ft.). Also useful for
shooting in the rain, at the beach, or on
ski slopes.
Interface Cable IFC-600PCU
z For connecting the camera to a computer
or printer.
Remote Switch RS-60E3
z Enables remote shutter button operation
(pressing the button halfway or all the
way down).
Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3
z Set a self-timer or interval timer, or
control the camera in other ways.
Note that Remote Controller Adapter
RA-E3 (sold separately) is required
in order to connect the timer remote
controller to the camera.
Lens Hood LH-DC110 (with cap)
z Prevents extraneous light from entering
the lens and causing ares or ghosting,
which reduce image quality.
183
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
4
Turn the camera on.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Images from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
z When nished, turn off the camera and
TV before disconnecting the cable.
● Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is
connected to a television.
● Some information may not be available when using a TV as the
display (
=
205).
● Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is
connected to an HDTV.
Using Optional Accessories
Playback on a TV
Still Images
Movies
You can view your shots on a TV by connecting the camera to an HDTV
with a commercially available HDMI cable (not exceeding 2.5 m / 8.2
ft., with a Type D terminal on the camera end). Movies shot at an image
quality of [
], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], or
[ ] can be viewed in high denition.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.
1
Make sure the camera and TV are
off.
2
Connect the camera to the TV.
z On the TV, insert the cable plug fully into
the HDMI input as shown.
z On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
3
Turn the TV on and switch to
external input.
z Switch the TV input to the external input
you connected the cable to in step 2.
184
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
3
Charge the battery pack.
z CA-DC30: Flip out the plug (1) and plug
the compact power adapter into a power
outlet (2).
z CA-DC30E: Plug the power cord into the
compact power adapter, then plug the
other end into a power outlet.
z Charging begins and the USB charge
lamp lights up.
z The lamp turns off when charging
nishes.
z Remove the compact power adapter from
the power outlet and the interface cable
from the camera.
● To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
● When charging another battery pack, always disconnect the
interface cable from the camera before replacing the battery pack
for charging.
Charging via USB
The battery pack can be charged without removing it from the camera by
using Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E and Interface Cable
IFC-600PCU, both sold separately.
1
Insert the battery pack.
z Follow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Your Memory Card” (
=
20)
to open the cover.
z Insert the battery pack as described in
step 2 of “Inserting the Battery Pack and
Your Memory Card” (
=
20).
z Follow step 3 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Your Memory Card” (
=
20)
to close the cover.
2
Connect the compact power adapter
to the camera.
z With the camera turned off, open the
cover (1). Hold the smaller plug of the
interface cable (sold separately) facing
as shown and insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal (2).
z Insert the larger plug of the interface
cable into the compact power adapter.
(
1
)
(
2
)
185
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Using a Lens Hood (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
To reduce the amount of extraneous light entering the lens, you can attach
optional Lens Hood LH-DC110.
z Make sure the camera is off.
z Align the lens hood threads with the
camera threads and turn the lens hood in
the direction shown.
z Make sure not to attach the lens hood too
tightly. Doing so could prevent removal of
the lens hood and damage the camera.
z To remove the lens hood, turn it in the
opposite direction.
● Vignetting may occur if you use the built-in ash when the lens
hood is attached.
● For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
“Power” (
=
225).
● You can view images even while the battery is charging, by
turning the camera on and entering Playback mode (
=
24).
However, you cannot shoot while the battery is charging.
● Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
● The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
Using a Computer to Charge the Battery
● You can also charge the battery pack by inserting the larger plug of the
interface cable into a computer’s USB terminal in step 2 of “Charging
via USB” (
=
184). For details about USB connections on the
computer, refer to the computer user manual.
● When charging is nished, the indicator on the back of the camera
blinks green. However, the indicator also blinks green if the computer
enters sleep or other modes and charging is interrupted.
● Charging stops and the indicator goes off if, after you begin
charging, you press the power button to turn the camera off.
● With some computers, battery charging may require the memory
card to be in the camera. Insert the memory card in the camera
(
=
20) before connecting the cable to the computer’s USB
port.
186
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Using a Timer Remote Controller
(Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
To set a self-timer or interval timer or control the camera in other
ways, you can use optional Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3. This is
convenient in time-lapse photography of blooming owers, for example.
Note that a remote controller adapter (RA-E3, sold separately) is required
in order to connect the timer remote controller to the camera.
● Also refer to the TC-80N3 instruction manual for additional
information.
1
Connect the timer remote controller
to the remote controller adapter.
z Connect the timer remote controller to the
remote controller adapter as shown.
2
Connect the adapter to the camera.
z Make sure the camera is off.
z Open the terminal cover and insert the
adapter plug.
3
Shoot.
z Turn the camera on.
z To shoot, operate the timer remote
controller.
Using a Remote Switch (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
An optional Remote Switch RS-60E3 can be used to avoid camera shake
that may otherwise occur when pressing the shutter button directly. This
optional accessory is convenient when shooting at slow shutter speeds.
1
Connect the remote switch.
z Make sure the camera is off.
z Open the terminal cover and insert the
remote switch plug.
2
Shoot.
z To shoot, press the release button on the
remote switch.
187
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
3
Choose shooting mode [ ], [ ],
[ ], or [ ].
z In other modes, the ash is adjusted and
red automatically, as needed.
4
Congure the external ash.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
z Options already set on the ash itself are
displayed.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then set the
desired option.
z Available items vary depending on the
shooting mode and the ash attached
(
=
188).
● Settings for the built-in ash cannot be congured while a
Speedlite EX series ash is attached, because that setting screen
is no longer accessible.
● You can also access the setting screen by pressing the [
] button
for at least one second.
● [Flash Control] is not available when the 600EX II-RT, 600EX-RT,
600EX, or 580EX II has been set up for stroboscopic ash.
● 320EX only: Auto LED lighting is only available in low-light movie
recording or in Movie mode. In this case, the [
] icon is shown.
Using an External Flash (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
More sophisticated ash photography is possible with an optional
Speedlite EX series ash. For movie shooting using an LED light, the
optional Speedlite 320EX ash is available.
● This camera does not support some Speedlite EX series
functions.
● Non-EX series Canon ash units may not re correctly or may not
re at all, in some cases.
● Use of non-Canon ash units (especially high-voltage ash units)
or ash accessories may prevent normal camera operation and
may damage the camera.
● Also refer to the Speedlite EX series manual for additional
information.
Speedlite EX Series
Still Images
Movies
These optional ash units can provide bright lighting and meet a variety of
ash photography needs.
1
Attach the ash.
z Make sure the camera is off, and then
attach the ash unit to the hot shoe.
2
Turn the ash on, and then turn the
camera on.
z A red [ ] icon is now displayed.
z The ash pilot lamp will light up when the
ash is ready.
188
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
*1 E-TTL mode is used for the ash.
*2 M mode is used for the ash.
In [
] shooting mode, E-TTL mode is also available for the ash. In this case,
when the ash res, ash exposure compensation set on the ash is applied to
the ash output level set on the camera.
*3 Can be congured only when [Flash Mode] is [Auto] and ash exposure
compensation set on the ash is [+0]. When you adjust ash exposure
compensation on 600EX II-RT, 600EX-RT, 600EX, 580EX II, or 430EX II
Speedlites, the camera display will be updated accordingly.
*4 Can be congured when [Flash Mode] is [Manual]. Linked to settings on the
ash unit.
*5 1/64 for Speedlite 430EX II/430EX/320EX/270EX II/270EX.
*6 Congure other options on the ash unit itself. Available with Speedlite
600EX II-RT/600EX-RT/600EX/580EX II/90EX. When this item is not set to [Off],
[Shutter Sync.] cannot be set to [2nd-curtain]. (If [Shutter Sync.] is set to [2nd-
curtain], it will be changed to [1st-curtain].)
*7 Can only be congured when [Flash Mode] is [Auto].
*8 Restores all default settings. You can also restore defaults for [Safety FE]
and [Red-Eye Lamp] from [
5] tab > [Reset camera] > [Basic settings] on the
camera (
=
177).
● In [ ] shooting mode, icons representing Smiling, Sleeping,
Babies (Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), and Children shooting
scenes determined by the camera are not displayed, and the
camera does not shoot continuously (
=
40).
Using Speedlite Bracket SB-E2 (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
z Using the optional Speedlite Bracket
SB-E2 can help prevent unnatural
shadows next to subjects during vertical
shooting.
z To keep the screen out of the way of the
bracket, use the screen closed and facing
outward.
Camera Settings Available with an External Flash
(Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
The following items are available in [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode. In
other shooting modes, only [Red-Eye Lamp] can be congured. (With
autoash control, the ash always res.) However, external ash units do
not re in modes that the built-in ash does not re (
=
207).
Item Options
Shooting Mode
Flash Mode
Auto*
1
O O O
O
Manual*
2
O O O O
Flash Exp. Comp*
3
–3 to +3
O O O O
Flash Output*
4
1/128*
5
– 1/1
(in 1/3-stop increments)
O O O O
Shutter Sync. 1st-curtain/2nd-curtain/Hi-speed
O O O O
Wireless Func.*
6
Off/Optical/Radio
O O O O
Red-Eye Lamp On/Off
O O O O
Safety FE*
7
On
O O O O
Off
O O O O
Clear Flash Settings*
8
O O O O
189
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Installing the Software
Install the software as described in steps 1 – 2 of “Installing
CameraWindow” (
=
149).
Saving Images to a Computer
Using a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Micro-B), you can
connect the camera to the computer and save images to the computer.
1
Connect the camera to the
computer.
z With the camera turned off, open the
cover. With the smaller plug of the cable
in the orientation shown, insert the plug
fully into the camera terminal.
z Connect the larger cable plug to the
computer. For details on computer
connections, refer to the computer user
manual.
2
Display CameraWindow.
z Mac OS: CameraWindow is displayed
when a connection is established
between the camera and computer.
Using the Software
To utilize the features of the following software, download the software
from the Canon website and install it on your computer.
● CameraWindow
- Import images to your computer
- Add Picture Styles saved on your computer to the camera
● Image Transfer Utility
- Set up Image Sync (
=
162) and receive images
● Map Utility
- Use a map to view GPS information that has been added to images
● Digital Photo Professional
- Browse, process, and edit RAW images
● Picture Style Editor
- Edit Picture Styles and create and save Picture Style les
● To view and edit movies on a computer, use preinstalled or
commonly available software compatible with movies recorded by
the camera.
● Image Transfer Utility can also be downloaded from the Image
Sync settings page of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Computer Connections via a Cable
Checking Your Computer Environment
For detailed software system requirements and compatibility information
(including support in new operating systems), visit the Canon website.
190
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
● Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ]
icon in the taskbar.
● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
● Although you can save images to a computer simply by
connecting your camera to the computer without using the
software, the following limitations apply.
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the
computer until camera images are accessible.
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal
orientation.
- RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images)
may not be saved.
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved
to a computer.
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image
information, depending on the operating system version, the
software in use, or image le sizes.
z Windows: Follow the steps introduced
below.
z On the screen displayed, click the change
program link of [
].
z Choose [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera] and then click [OK].
z Double-click [
].
3
Save the images to the computer.
z Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
z Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
z After images are saved, close
CameraWindow, press the [
] button to
turn the camera off, and unplug the cable.
z To view images you save to a computer,
use preinstalled or commonly available
software compatible with images
captured by the camera.
191
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
4
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
5
Access the printing screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ], and
press the [ ] button again.
6
Print the image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Print], and then press the
[
] button.
z Printing now begins.
z To print other images, repeat the above
procedures starting from step 4 after
printing is nished.
z When you are nished printing, turn the
camera and printer off and disconnect
the cable.
● For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately),
see “Printers” (
=
182).
Printing Images
Still Images
Movies
Print your shots and congure a variety of settings used for your printer
or photo printing services by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-
compatible printer with a cable.
A Canon SELPHY CP printer is used in this example of PictBridge
printing. Also refer to your printer user manual.
Easy Print
Still Images
Movies
Print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible
printer with a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Micro-B).
1
Make sure the camera and printer
are off.
2
Connect the camera to the printer.
z Open the terminal cover and insert the
smaller plug fully into the camera terminal
in the orientation shown.
z Connect the larger cable plug to the
printer. For other connection details, refer
to the printer manual.
3
Turn the printer on.
192
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Cropping Images before Printing
Still Images
Movies
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entire image.
1
Choose [Cropping].
z After following step 1 in “Conguring Print
Settings” (
=
192) to access the printing
screen, choose [Cropping] and press the
[ ] button.
z A cropping frame is now displayed,
indicating the image area to print.
2
Adjust the cropping frame as
needed.
z To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
z To move the frame, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
z To rotate the frame, turn the [ ] dial.
z When nished, press the [ ] button.
3
Print the image.
z Follow step 6 in “Easy Print” (
=
191)
to print.
● Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some
aspect ratios.
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the printing screen.
z Follow steps 1 – 5 in “Easy Print”
(
=
191) to access this screen.
2
Congure the settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose an option (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button to return to the
printing screen.
Default Matches current printer settings.
Date Prints images with the date added.
File No. Prints images with the le number added.
Both
Prints images with both the date and le
number added.
Off
–
Default Matches current printer settings.
Off
–
On
Uses information from the time of shooting
to print under optimal settings.
Red-Eye 1 Corrects red-eye.
No. of Copies Choose the number of copies to print.
Cropping
–
Specify a desired image area to print
(
=
192).
Paper
Settings
–
Specify the paper size, layout, and other
details (
=
193).
193
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Available Layout Options
Default Matches current printer settings.
Bordered Prints with blank space around the image.
Borderless Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.
N-up Choose how many images to print per sheet.
ID Photo
Prints images for identication purposes.
Only available for images with a recording pixel setting of L
and an aspect ratio of 3:2.
Fixed Size
Choose the print size.
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.
Printing ID Photos
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [ID Photo].
z Following steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing
Paper Size and Layout before Printing”
(
=
193), choose [ID Photo] and press
the [ ] button.
2
Choose the long and short side
length.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose the length (either press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Paper Settings].
z After following step 1 in “Conguring Print
Settings” (
=
192) to access the printing
screen, choose [Paper Settings] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a paper size.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose a type of paper.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
4
Choose a layout.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option.
z When choosing [N-up], press the [
]
button. On the next screen, choose the
number of images per sheet (either press
the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button.
5
Print the image.
z Follow step 6 in “Easy Print” (
=
191)
to print.
194
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Movie Printing Options
Single Prints the current scene as a still image.
Sequence
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single
sheet of paper. You can also print the folder number, le
number, and elapsed time for the frame by setting [Caption]
to [On].
● To cancel printing in progress, press the [ ] button, choose [OK],
and then press the [
] button again.
● After displaying a scene to print as described in steps 2 – 5 of
“Playback” (
=
111), you can also access the screen in step 1
here by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to choose [ ] in the movie
control panel and then pressing the [
] button.
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images
Movies
Batch printing (
=
196) and ordering prints from a photo development
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a
memory card and congure relevant settings, such as the number of
copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will
conform to DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.
● RAW images cannot be included in print list.
3
Choose the printing area.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Cropping], and then press
the [ ] button.
z Follow step 2 in “Cropping Images before
Printing” (
=
192) to choose the printing
area.
4
Print the image.
z Follow step 6 in “Easy Print” (
=
191)
to print.
Printing Movie Scenes
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the printing screen.
z Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(
=
191) to choose a movie. The screen
at left is displayed.
2
Choose a printing method.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button. On the
next screen, choose an option (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button to
return to the printing screen.
3
Print the image.
z Follow step 6 in “Easy Print” (
=
191)
to print.
195
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
● Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both
[Date] and [File No.] at the same time.
● Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-
compatible printers (sold separately).
● The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/
Time] on the [
2] tab (
=
22).
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Select Images & Qty.].
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Print
settings] on the [ 4] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Select Images & Qty.],
and then press the [ ] button (
=
31).
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
z If you specify index printing for the
image, it is labeled with a [
] icon. To
cancel index printing for the image, press
the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer
displayed.
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images
Movies
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or le number, and
other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print
list.
z Press the [
] button, choose [Print
settings] on the [ 4] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Print Settings], and then
press the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose and congure items as needed
(
=
31).
Print Type
Standard One image is printed per sheet.
Index
Smaller versions of multiple images are
printed per sheet.
Both Both standard and index formats are printed.
Date
On Images are printed with the shooting date.
Off
–
File No.
On Images are printed with the le number.
Off
–
Clear DPOF
data
On
All image print list settings are cleared after
printing.
Off
–
● Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the
printer or photo development service, in some cases.
● [
] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were congured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
196
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Clearing All Images from the Print List
z Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
195), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images
Movies
z When images have been added to the
print list (
=
194 –
=
196), this screen
is displayed after you connect the camera
to a PictBridge-compatible printer. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Print now],
and then simply press the [ ] button to
print the images in the print list.
z Any DPOF print job that you temporarily
stop will be resumed from the next image.
3
Specify the number of prints.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the number of prints (up
to 99).
z To set up printing for other images and
specify the number of prints, repeat steps
2 – 3.
z When nished, press the [
] button
to return to the menu screen.
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
Still Images
Movies
z Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
195), choose
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
122) to specify images.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Order], and then press the [ ] button.
Setting Up Printing for All Images
Still Images
Movies
z Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
195), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
197
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
z [ ] is displayed.
z To remove the image from the photobook,
press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no
longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to specify other
images.
z When nished, press the [
] button
to return to the menu screen.
Adding All Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
197), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Removing All Images from a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
197), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Adding Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images
on a memory card and using CameraWindow to import them to your
computer (
=
189), where they are copied to their own folder. This
is convenient when ordering printed photobooks online or printing
photobooks with your own printer.
Choosing a Selection Method
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Photobook Set-up] on the [ 4] tab, and
then choose how you will select images.
● [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were congured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
Adding Images Individually
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Select].
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
197), choose
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
198
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Troubleshooting
If you think there is a problem with the camera, rst check the following. If
the issue persists, contact a Customer Support Help Desk.
Power
Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.
● Conrm that the battery pack is charged (
=
19).
● Conrm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way (
=
20).
● Conrm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (
=
20).
● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
The battery pack runs out of power quickly.
● Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery
pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals
do not touch any metal objects.
● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
● If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon
after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.
The lens is not retracted.
● Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the
cover, turn the camera on, and then turn it off again (
=
20).
The battery pack is swollen.
● Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if
battery swelling prevents the battery pack from tting in the camera, contact a
Customer Support Help Desk.
Display on a TV
Camera images look distorted or are not displayed on a TV (
=
183).
Appendix
Helpful information when using the camera
199
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Subjects in shots look too dark.
● Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (
=
96).
● Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (
=
78).
● Adjust brightness by using the Auto Lighting Optimizer (
=
82).
● Use AE lock or spot metering (
=
78,
=
79).
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
● Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (
=
35).
● Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (
=
78).
● Use AE lock or spot metering (
=
78,
=
79).
● Reduce the lighting on subjects.
Shots look too dark despite the ash ring (
=
38).
● Shoot within ash range (
=
223).
● Adjust brightness by using ash exposure compensation or changing the ash
output level (
=
97,
=
102).
● Increase the ISO speed (
=
80).
Subjects in ash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
● Shoot within ash range (
=
223).
● Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [
] (
=
35).
● Adjust brightness by using ash exposure compensation or changing the ash
output level (
=
97,
=
102).
White spots appear in ash shots.
● This is caused by light from the ash reecting off dust or airborne particles.
Shots look grainy.
● Lower the ISO speed (
=
80).
● High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (
=
56).
Subjects are affected by red-eye.
● Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (
=
55). The red-eye reduction lamp (
=
4)
will light up for ash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye
reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at
closer range.
● Edit images using red-eye correction (
=
131).
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is
slower.
● Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (
=
171).
Shooting settings or Quick Set menu settings are not available.
● Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available
in Each Shooting Mode”, “Quick Set Menu”, and “Shooting Tab” (
=
207 –
=
212).
Shooting
Cannot shoot.
● In Playback mode (
=
111), press the shutter button halfway (
=
27).
Strange display on the screen under low light (
=
29).
Strange display on the screen when shooting.
● Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are
recorded in movies.
- The screen may icker and horizontal banding may appear under uorescent
or LED lighting.
Full-screen display is not available while shooting (
=
49).
[
] ashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting
is not possible (
=
38).
[
] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (
=
38).
● Set [IS Mode] to [Continuous] (
=
53).
● Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [
] (
=
96).
● Increase the ISO speed (
=
80).
● Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure
the camera (
=
53).
Shots are out of focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the
way down to shoot (
=
27).
● Make sure subjects are within focusing range (
=
223).
● Set [AF-assist beam ring] to [Enable] (
=
54).
● Conrm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.
● Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (
=
91,
=
95).
Shots are blurry.
● Blurring may occur more often when Touch Shutter is used to shoot, depending
on shooting conditions. Hold the camera still when shooting.
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
● To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing
the shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before pressing the shutter
button halfway (or pressing it halfway repeatedly).
200
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Playback
Playback is not possible.
● Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename
les or alter the folder structure.
Playback stops, or audio skips.
● Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the
camera (
=
171).
● There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards
that have slow read speeds.
● When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may
skip if computer performance is inadequate.
Sound is not played during movies.
● Adjust the volume (
=
24) if you have activated [Mute] (
=
175) or the sound
in the movie is faint.
● No sound is played for movies shot in [
] (
=
65), [ ] (
=
68), [ ]
(
=
74), or [ ] (
=
75) mode because audio is not recorded in these modes.
Cannot access the Story Highlights home screen.
● Home screen display is not possible when connected to a printer. Disconnect the
camera from the printer.
● Home screen display is not possible during Wi-Fi connections. End the Wi-Fi
connection.
A desired subject icon for an album is not displayed on the Story
Highlights home screen.
● In simple information display mode (
=
113), choose an image that shows the
name of the person for the album before accessing the Story Highlights home
screen (
=
136).
Memory Card
The memory card is not recognized.
● Restart the camera, with the memory card in it (
=
26).
The Babies or Children icon is not displayed.
● The Babies and Children icons will not be displayed if the birthday is not set in
face information (
=
45). If the icons still are not displayed even when you set
the birthday, re-register face information (
=
45), or make sure that the date/
time is set correctly (
=
174).
Touch AF or Touch Shutter does not work.
● Touch AF or Touch Shutter will not work if you touch the edges of the screen.
Touch closer to the center of the screen.
Shooting Movies
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.
● Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports
high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the
length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time
(
=
171).
[
] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.
● The camera’s internal memory buffer lled up as the camera could not record to
the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.
- Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (
=
171).
- Lower the image quality (
=
51).
- Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording.
Zooming is not possible.
● Zooming is not possible in [ ] mode (
=
67).
● Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [
] (
=
65) and [ ]
(
=
74) modes.
Subjects look distorted.
● Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a
malfunction.
201
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Cannot send images.
● The destination device has insufcient storage space. Increase the storage space
on the destination device and resend the images.
● The write-protect switch of the memory card in the destination camera is set to
the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position.
● RAW images cannot be sent to the camera or displayed on TV sets. RAW images
selected for transferring to a smartphone are transferred as JPEG images.
However, RAW images can be sent using Image Sync.
● Images cannot be sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if
you move or rename image les or folders on the computer that received images
sent using Image Sync via an access point (
=
162). Before moving or renaming
these image les or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already
been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.
Cannot resize images for sending.
● Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the recording pixel setting of their
original size.
● Movies cannot be resized.
Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.
● Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to reduce
sending time (
=
162).
● Movies may take a long time to send.
● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference such as
microwave ovens or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
No notication message is received on a computer or smartphone after
adding CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the camera.
● Make sure the email address you entered is correct, and try adding the
destination again.
● Check the email settings on the computer or smartphone. If they are congured to
block email from certain domains, you may not be able to receive the notication
message.
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the
camera or giving it to someone else.
● Reset the Wi-Fi settings (
=
169).
Computer
Cannot transfer images to a computer.
● When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the
transfer speed as follows.
- Press the [
] button to enter Playback mode. Hold the [ ] button
down as you press the [
] and [ ] buttons at the same time. On the next
screen, press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [B], and then press the [ ] button.
Wi-Fi
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu.
● The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer,
computer, or TV via a cable. Disconnect the cable.
Cannot add a device/destination.
● A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase
unneeded connection information from the camera rst, and then add new
devices/destinations (
=
167).
● Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services (
=
154).
● To add a smartphone, rst install the dedicated application Camera Connect on
your smartphone (
=
146).
● To add a computer, rst install the software CameraWindow on your computer.
Also check your computer and Wi-Fi environment and settings (
=
149,
=
150).
● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference such as
microwave ovens or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Cannot connect to the access point.
● Conrm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the
camera (
=
225). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to
specify a supported channel manually.
202
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Unidentied Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back
MOV/Cannot play back MP4
● Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.
● It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a
computer, or images shot with another camera.
Cannot magnify!/Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/
Unselectable image./No identication information
● The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or
already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that
starred (*) functions are not available for movies.
Edit ID Info* (
=
119), Magnify* (
=
120), Rotate* (
=
125), Favorites (
=
126),
Edit* (
=
128), Print List* (
=
194), and Photobook Set-up* (
=
197).
Invalid selection range
● When specifying a range for image selection (
=
122,
=
125,
=
196), you
attempted to choose an initial image that was after the nal image, or vice-versa.
Exceeded selection limit
● More than 998 images were selected for Print List (
=
194) or Photobook Set-up
(
=
197). Choose 998 images or less.
● Print List (
=
194) or Photobook Set-up (
=
197) settings could not be saved
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.
● You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (
=
121), Erase
(
=
123), Favorites (
=
126), Print List (
=
194), or Photobook Set-up (
=
197).
Naming error!
● The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the
highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been
reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders
has been reached. On the [
1] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset]
(
=
170), or format the memory card (
=
171).
Lens Error
● This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is
used in dusty or sandy locations.
● Frequent display of this error message may indicate damage. In this case,
contact a Customer Support Help Desk.
On-Screen Messages
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.
Shooting or Playback
No memory card
● The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory
card facing the correct way (
=
20).
Memory card locked
● The write-protect switch of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch
the write-protect switch to the unlocked position (
=
20).
Cannot record!
● Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a
memory card facing the correct way (
=
20).
Memory card error (
=
171)
● If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a
supported memory card (
=
2) and have inserted it facing the correct way (
=
20),
contact a Customer Support Help Desk.
Insufcient space on card
● There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (
=
35,
=
56,
=
77,
=
99) or edit images (
=
128). Either erase unneeded images
(
=
123) or insert a memory card with enough free space (
=
20).
Touch AF unavailable
● Touch AF is not available in the current shooting mode (
=
207).
Touch AF canceled
● The subject selected for Touch AF can no longer be detected (
=
95).
Charge the battery (
=
19)
No Image.
● The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.
Protected! (
=
121)
203
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed
● You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.
● Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens and other
devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
● Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.
Sending failed
Memory card error
● If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Customer Support Help Desk.
Receiving failed
Insufcient space on card
● There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to
receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a
memory card with sufcient space.
Receiving failed
Memory card locked
● The write-protect switch of the memory card in the camera to receive the images
is set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked
position.
Receiving failed
Naming error!
● When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999)
have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.
Insufcient space on server
● Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create
space.
● Use Image Transfer Utility to save the images sent by the Image Sync (
=
162)
server to your computer.
Check network settings
● Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current
network settings.
A camera error was detected (error number)
● If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not
have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.
● Frequent display of this error message may indicate damage. In this case, write
down the error number (Exx) and contact a Customer Support Help Desk.
File Error
● Correct printing (
=
191) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is
connected to the printer.
Print error
● Check the paper size setting (
=
193). If this error message is displayed when
the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera
again.
Ink absorber full
● Contact a Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink absorber
replacement.
Wi-Fi
Connection failed
● No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (
=
150).
● A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the
connection.
● Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.
Cannot determine access point
● The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try
reconnecting again.
No access points found
● Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.
● When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the
correct SSID.
Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings
● Check the access point security settings (
=
150).
IP address conict
● Reset the IP address so that it does not conict with another.
204
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
(17) Connected via Bluetooth to a
smartphone and acquiring GPS
information (
=
164)
(18) Battery level (
=
204)
(19) Still image compression (
=
50),
Recording pixel setting (
=
50)
(20) Recordable shots
(21) Maximum continuous shots
(22) Zoom magnification (
=
42),
Digital tele-converter (
=
91)
(23) Movie quality (
=
51)
(24) Remaining time
(25) Histogram (
=
113)
(26) Quick Set menu (
=
30)
(27) Focus range (
=
88,
=
89),
AF lock (
=
95)
(28) Movie AE lock (
=
72)
(29) AF frame (
=
91), Spot AE point
frame (
=
79)
(30) Grid lines (
=
103)
(31) AE lock (
=
78), FE lock
(
=
97)
(32) Shutter speed (
=
99,
=
100)
(33) Aperture value (
=
100)
(34) Electronic level (
=
52)
(35) Exposure level (
=
100)
(36) Highlight tone priority (
=
82)
(37) ISO speed (
=
80)
(38) Hybrid Auto mode (
=
37)
(39) Camera shake warning (
=
38)
(40) Zoom bar (
=
35)
(41) Wind filter (
=
74)
(42) Time zone (
=
174)
(43) Image stabilization (
=
53)
(44) Display mode (
=
28)
(45)
Auto level (
=
53)
(46)
Auto slow shutter (
=
73)
(47) Attenuator (
=
74)
(48) Exposure simulation (
=
78)
(49) MF indicator (
=
89)
(50) Exposure compensation (
=
78)
Battery Level
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.
Display Details
Sufcient charge
Slightly depleted, but sufcient
(Blinking red)
Nearly depleted—charge the battery pack soon
[Charge the battery] Depleted—charge the battery pack immediately
On-Screen Information
Shooting (Information Display)
The same information is shown on the viewnder.
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
6
)
(
8
)
(
12
)
(
10
)
(
7
)
(
16
)
(
18
)
(
19
) (
20
) (
23
)
(
22
)
(
15
)
(
24
) (
25
)
(
26
)
(
27
)
(
30
)
(
49
)
(
50
)
(
32
)
(
38
)
(
39
)
(
33
) (
35
)(
34
) (
37
)
(
41
)
(
42
)
(
40
)
(
36
)(
31
)
(
9
)
(
11
)
(
13
)
(
14
)
(
5
)
(
17
)
(
43
) (
44
)
(
45
)
(
46
) (
47
) (
48
)
(
28
)
(
29
)
(
21
)
(1) Shooting mode (
=
207), Scene
icon (
=
39)
(2) Flash mode (
=
96)
(3) Flash exposure compensation /
Flash output level (
=
97,
=
102)
(4) Metering mode (
=
79)
(5) Touch Shutter (
=
44)
(6) ND filter (
=
81)
(7) High ISO speed noise reduction
(
=
80)
(8) Drive mode (
=
44), AEB
shooting (
=
81), Focus
bracketing (
=
90)
(9) Eco mode (
=
173)
(10) White balance (
=
83)
(11) Picture Style (
=
85)
(12) White balance correction (
=
84)
(13) Auto Lighting Optimizer (
=
82)
(14) Self-timer (
=
42)
(15) Bluetooth connection status
(
=
142)
(16) IS mode icon (
=
41)
205
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Info Display 2
(1) Shooting date/time (
=
21)
(2) Histogram (
=
113)
(3) Shooting mode (
=
207)
(4) Shutter speed (
=
99,
=
100)
(5) Aperture value (
=
100)
(6) Exposure compensation level
(
=
78)
(7) ISO speed (
=
80)
(8) Highlight tone priority (
=
82)
(9) White balance (
=
83)
(10) White balance correction
(
=
84)
(11) Picture Style setting details
(
=
85)
(12) Flash exposure compensation
(
=
97)
(13) Metering mode (
=
79)
(14) Auto Lighting Optimizer (
=
82)
(15) ND filter (
=
81), Short clip
playback effect (
=
74),
Miniature movie playback speed
(
=
65), Frame rate/interval time
of time-lapse movies (
=
75) or
star time-lapse movies (
=
68),
Star emphasis (
=
67), Star
trails shooting time (
=
67)
(16) High ISO speed noise reduction
(
=
80)
(17) Focus range (
=
88)
(18) Red-eye correction (
=
131)
(19) Image quality* (
=
50)
(20) Recording pixel setting
(21) Image size
* Cropped images are labeled with [
].
During Playback
Info Display 1
(1) Current image / Total images
(2) Battery level (
=
204)
(3) Wi-Fi signal strength (
=
141)
(4) Bluetooth connection status
(
=
142)
(5) Image Sync complete (
=
162)
(6) Edited*
1
(
=
128,
=
129,
=
130,
=
131)
(7) Favorites (
=
126)
(8) Protection (
=
121)
(9) Folder number - File number
(
=
170)
(10) Shutter speed (
=
99,
=
100)
(11) Aperture value (
=
100)
(12) Exposure compensation level
(
=
78)
(13) ISO speed (
=
80)
(14) Image quality*
2
(
=
50)
*1 Displayed for images with a creative lter, resizing, cropping, or red-eye
correction applied.
*2 Cropped images are labeled with [
].
206
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Summary of Movie Control Panel
The following operations are available on the movie control panel,
accessed as described in “Playback” (
=
111).
Touch to display the volume panel, and then touch [ ][ ] to
adjust the volume. At a volume of 0, [ ] is displayed.
Play
Slow Motion (To adjust the playback speed, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial. No sound is played.)
Skip Backward* or Previous Clip (=
135) (To continue skipping
backward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [ ]
button.)
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Skip Forward* or Next Clip (=
135) (To continue skipping
forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie (
=
135) is selected,
or an album without background music (
=
137))
Edit (
=
134)
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible
printer (
=
191).
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.
● During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the
previous or next clip) by pressing the [
][ ] buttons.
Info Display 3
Shows GPS information and an RGB histogram. Information on the top of
the screen is the same as for Info Display 2.
Info Display 4
Shows white balance information. Information on the top of the screen is
the same as for Info Display 2.
Info Display 5
Shows Picture Style information. Information on the top of the screen is
the same as for Info Display 2.
207
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Functions and Menu Tables
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
Shooting Mode
Function
/
Exposure Compensation (
=
78) *1
O
O O O
– – *2
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
ISO Speed (
=
80)
AUTO *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
100 – 25600 *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
Drive Mode (
=
44)
*1
O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
– – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
*1
O O O O
–
O
–
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
O O O
–
*1
O O O O
–
O
–
O
–
O O
– – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
O O O
–
Flash (
=
96)
*1 – – –
O O O
–
O O
– – – – –
O O O O O O O O
–
O
– – – – –
*1
O O O O
– –
O O O
– – – – –
O O O O O O O O
–
O
– – – – –
*1 –
O
–
O
*3 *3 – – – – – – – – *3 – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
External Flash Firing (
=
188)
O O O O O O O O O O
– – – – –
O O O O O O O O
–
O
– – – – –
Flash Exposure Compensation (
=
97) *1
O O O O
– – *4 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Flash Output Level (
=
102) *1
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Av/Tv Settings
(
=
99,
=
100)
Aperture Value *1
O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
Shutter Speed *1
O
–
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
Bulb Setting *1
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Program Shift (
=
78) *1 *5 *5 *5
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – *5
O
AE Lock/FE Lock*
6
(
=
78,
=
97)
O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O O
208
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
/
AE Lock (during recording)/Exposure
Compensation (
=
72,
=
78)
O O O O O
– – –
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O
–
AF Lock by touching during movie recording
(
=
72)
O O O O O
– – –
O O
–
O
– – –
O O
– –
O O
– –
O O
–
O
–
O
–
Optical Zoom
O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
AF Lock (when assigned to controls other
than the movie button (
=
105))
O O O O O
– – –
O O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O
AF Lock (when assigned to the movie button
(
=
105))
O O O O O
– – –
O O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O
– – – – –
Focus Range
(
=
58,
=
88,
=
89)
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*1
O O O O
– – –
O O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O
– –
O O O O
–
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
– – – – –
*1
O O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O
Manual Focus Switching When Recording
Movies (
=
72)
O O O O O
– – –
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
O O
–
O O O
–
Move AF Frame
(
=
91)
Center *1
O O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O
–
O O
–
O O O O
Periphery *1
O O O O
– – –
O O
–
O
*7 *7 *7
O O
– –
O O
– –
O O
–
O O O O
Touch AF (
=
95)
O O O O O O O O O O
–
O
*7 *7 *7
O O
– –
O O
– –
O O
–
O O O O
Face Select (
=
94)
O O O O O O O O O O
–
O
– – –
O O O
–
O O O
–
O
– –
O O O
–
Touch Shutter (
=
44)
O O O O O O O
*8
O O
–
O
– – –
O O
*8 *8
O O
*8 –
O O
*8 – – – –
Change Display (
=
29)
O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Set in [Brightness].
*3 Not available, but switches to [
] in some cases.
*4 Adjusted to suit the [Brightness] setting.
*5 Aperture value, shutter speed, and ISO speed may be changed
automatically to maintain suitable exposure.
*6 FE lock not available in [
] ash mode.
*7 Only when [
] is selected.
*8 Only available for shooting. Subject designation not available.
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
209
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Quick Set Menu
Shooting Mode
Function
/
AF method (
=
91)
*1
O O O O O O O O O
–
O
– – –
O O O
–
O O O
–
O
– –
O O O
–
*1
O O O O
– – –
O O
–
O
– – –
O O O
–
O O O
–
O
– –
O O O
–
*1
O O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
AF operation (
=
93)
*1
O O O O O
*2
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*1
O O O O
– – – – – –
O
– – – –
O
– –
O O O
–
O O
– – – – –
Image quality (
=
50) See “Shooting Tab” (
=
212).
Movie
rec. size
(
=
51)
When Set
to NTSC
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O
–
O
–
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O
–
O O
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O
–
O
–
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
*3
O O O O O O
–
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
*3
O O O O
–
O
–
When Set
to PAL
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O
–
O
–
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O
–
O O
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
*3
O O O O O O
–
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
*3
O O O O
–
O
–
Self-Timer (
=
42)
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
/ / *1
O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Self-Timer Settings
Custom
Timer
Delay*
4
*1
O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Shots*
5
*1
O O O O
–
O
–
O
– –
O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – –
210
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
/
ND Filter (
=
81)
*1
O O O O O O
– – – – –
O O O O O
–
O O O O
– –
O O O O O O
*1
O O O O
– –
O O O O O
– – – – –
O
– – – –
O O
– – – – – –
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O O
White balance
(
=
83)
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
/ / / /
/ /
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O O
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
O O O O
WB correction (
=
84) *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O O
WB correction (Underwater) (
=
58)
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
– – – – –
Color Adjustment (
=
70)
– – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Set color temp. (
=
84) *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O O
Picture Style (
=
85)
*1
O O O O O O
–
O
–
O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O O
*1
O O O O
– –
O
–
O
– –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
/ / /
/ / /
/ /
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O O
Metering mode
(
=
79)
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
/ *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Auto Lighting Optimizer
(
=
82)
*1
O O O O
– –
O
–
O O
–
O O O
–
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
/ *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
O
–
*1
O O O O O O
–
O
– –
O
– – –
O
– – – – – – – –
O
–
O
–
O
–
211
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
/
Still Image Aspect Ratio
(
=
49)
*1
O O O O
–
O
–
O O
–
O O O O
–
O
– – – – –
O
–
O O
*6
O
*6
O
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
O O O
– – – –
*1
O O O O
–
O
–
O O
–
O O O
– –
O
– – – – –
O
–
O O
*6
–
*6
–
*1
O O O O
–
O O O O
–
O O O
– –
O
– – – – – – –
O O
– – – –
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 [
] when subject movement is detected.
*3 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (
=
49).
*4 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots.
*5 One shot (cannot be modied) in modes without selection of the number of shots.
*6 Set automatically to suit the aspect ratio of the movie recording size.
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
212
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Tab
Shooting Mode
Function
/
1
Rec. Mode (
=
56,
=
59,
=
72)
– – – – – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Image quality (
=
50)
JPEG
– *1
O O O O
–
O
–
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O O O O
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
/ / / /
/
*1
O O O O
–
O O O O
–
O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
RAW
– *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*1
O O O O
–
O
–
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O O O O
Still Image Aspect Ratio See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
209).
Shooting information display (
=
103)
Screen
info/ toggle
settings
Custom display 1/
Custom display 2/
No info display
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
VF info/
toggle
settings
No info display/
Custom display 1/
Custom display 2
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
VF vertical
display
On *1
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – –
Off *1
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Grid
display
3x3
/6x4 /
3x3+diag
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Histogram
Brightness/
RGB
Brightness/
RGB
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Display
size
Large/
Small
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Expo.
simulation
(
=
78)
Enable *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Disable *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
213
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
/
1
Reverse
Display
(
=
21)
On *1
O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Off *1
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Display Mode
(
=
28)
Display
priority
Power
Saving
*1
O O O O O O O O O O
– – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – –
Smooth *1
O O O O
–
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
2
VF display
format
(
=
28)
Display 1/Display 2 *1
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Image review
(
=
55)
Off/Hold *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
2 sec./4 sec./8 sec. *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Touch Shutter
(
=
44)
Touch
Shutter
Enable *1
O O O O O O O O O
–
O
– – –
O O O O O O O
–
O O O
– – – –
Disable *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
AF frame
pos’n
Center/
Touch
point
*1
O O O O
– – –
O O
–
O
– – –
O O
– –
O O
– –
O O
– – – – –
Touch & drag
AF settings
(
=
104)
Touch &
drag AF
Enable *1
O O O O O O
–
O O
–
O O O O O O
– –
O O
–
O O O
–
O O O O
Disable *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Pos’n
method
Absolute/
Relative
*1
O O O O O O
–
O O
–
O O O O O O
– –
O O
–
O O O
–
O O O O
Active
touch
area
Whole
panel/
Right/
Left/
Top right/
Btm. right/
Top left/
Btm. left
*1
O O O O O O
–
O O
–
O O O O O O
– –
O O
–
O O O
–
O O O O
214
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
/
2
Face ID
Settings
(
=
45)
Face ID On/Off *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Function Assignment (
=
105)
Shutter/AE lock
AF/AE lock *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
AE lock/AF *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
AF/AF lock, no
AE lock
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
AE/AF, no AE
lock
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Dials
*1
– – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – –
/
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
button *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – –
button *1
O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Quick setting menu layout (
=
107)
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
215
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
/
3
Digital Zoom
(
=
42)
Standard *1
O O O O O O
–
O
– –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O
–
O O
Off *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
1.6x/2.0x *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
AF operation See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
209).
AF method See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
209).
AF Frame
Size*
2
(
=
91)
Normal *1
O O O O
– – –
O O O O
– – – –
O O O O O O
–
O O
–
O O O O
Small *1
O O O O
– – –
O O O O
– – – –
O O
–
O O O
–
O O
– – – – –
Continuous AF
(
=
93)
Enable *1
O O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O
Disable *1
O O O O
– –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – –
AF+MF
(
=
94)
On/Off *1
O O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O
AF-assist
beam ring
(
=
54)
Enable *1
O O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O
– –
O O O O
Disable *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
216
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
/
4
MF-Point
Zoom
(
=
89)
Off *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
5x/10x *1
O O O O
– – –
O
– – –
O O O
–
O
– – – – – – –
O
– – – – –
Safety MF
(
=
89)
On *1
O O O O
– – –
O O
– – – – –
O O O O
– –
O O O O
–
O O O O
Off *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
MF Peaking
Settings
(
=
90)
Peaking
On *1
O O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O
Off *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Level
Low/
High
*1
O O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O
Color
Red/
Yellow/
Blue
*1
O O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O
IS Settings
(
=
98)
IS Mode
Off *1
O O O O O O O O O
– –
O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Continuous
*1
O O O O O O O O O
–
O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
Shoot
Only
*1
O O O O
– –
O O O O
– – – – –
O O O O O O O O O O
– – – –
Dynamic
IS
Low *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Standard *1
O O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O
–
O
–
High
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
O
–
Auto level
(
=
53)
Enable *1
O O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O
–
O
–
Disable *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
217
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
/
5 *
5
Bracketing
(
=
90)
*1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
/ *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
ISO speed (
=
80)
ISO Speed See “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode” (
=
207).
ISO Auto
Settings
Max ISO Speed *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
Rate of
Change
Standard *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Fast/
Slow
*1
–
O
–
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Highlight
tone priority
(
=
82)
Disable *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Enable *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
O
–
Auto Lighting Optimizer (
=
82) See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
209).
Metering mode (
=
79) See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
209).
ND Filter (
=
81) See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
209).
Flash Control (
=
55,
=
97,
=
98,
=
102)
Flash Mode
Auto *1
O O O O O O O O O
– – – – –
O O O O O O O O
–
O
– – – – –
Manual *1
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Flash Exp. Comp See “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode” (
=
207).
Flash Output See “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode” (
=
207).
Shutter Sync.
1st-curtain *1
O O O O O O O O O
– – – – –
O O O O O O O O
–
O
– – – – –
2nd-curtain *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Red-Eye Lamp
On *1
O O O O O O O O O
– – – – –
O O O O O O O O
– – – – – – –
Off *1
O O O O O O O O O
– – – – –
O O O O O O O O
–
O
– – – – –
Safety FE
On *1
O O O O O O O O O
– – – – –
O O O O O O O O
–
O
– – – – –
Off *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Color Adjustment See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
209).
218
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
/
6 *
6
White balance (
=
83) See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
209).
Custom WB (
=
83)
O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
O O O O
WB correction (
=
84) See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
209).
Picture Style (
=
85) See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
209).
High ISO speed NR
(
=
80)
Standard *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Low/High *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Spot AE Point
(
=
79)
Center/
AF Point
*1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Safety shift
(
=
100)
On *1
–
O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Off *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
219
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
/
7 *
7
Self-Timer See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
209).
Digest Type
(
=
37)
Include Stills/
No Stills
– – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Star Emphasis
(
=
67)
Sharp/Soft
– – – – – – – – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Off
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Star Time-Lapse Movie Setting (
=
68)
Save
Stills
Enable/Disable
– – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Effect*
3
/ / / /
– – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Shot
Interval
15 sec./30 sec./
1 min.*
4
– – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Frame
Rate
NTSC:
/
PAL:
/
– – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Shooting
Time
60 min./90 min./
Unlimited
– – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Auto
exposure
Lock to 1st shot/
For each shot
– – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Time-lapse movie settings (
=
75)
Shooting
scene
Scene 1/Scene 2/
Scene 3
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
Interval/
Shots
2-4 sec./
30-900 (Scene 1)
5-10 sec./
30-720 (Scene 2)
11-30 sec./
30-240 (Scene 3)
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
Exposure Fixed/For each shot
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
Review
image
Enable/Disable
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
220
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Mode
Function
/
8
Movie rec. size (
=
51) See “Quick Set Menu” (
=
209).
Wind Filter (
=
74)
Auto *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O
–
O
–
Off *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – –
O
– – – – – – –
O
– – –
O O O O
Attenuator (
=
74)
Auto *1
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Off/On *1
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
O
–
Auto slow shutter
(
=
73)
Enable
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O
– – –
Disable
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Only available when the AF method is [1-point AF].
*3 Available when still saving is set to [Disable].
*4 Available when the effect is set to [Off].
*5 Items from the [
8] tab are shown on the [ 5] tab in [ ] mode. Items from the
[
7] tab are shown on the [ 5] tab in these modes: [ ], [ ], and [ ]. Items
from the [
6] tab are shown on the [ 5] tab in [ ] mode.
*6 Items from the [
8] tab are shown on the [ 6] tab in these modes: [ ], [ ],
and [
]. Items from the [ 7] tab are shown on the [ 6] tab in these modes:
[
], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ],
[
], and [ ].
*7 Items from the [
8] tab are shown on the [ 7] tab in these modes: [ ], [ ],
[
], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ].
- Names of people in shots taken using Face ID (
=
45) may not be displayed in
some modes or with some settings, but they will be recorded in the still images.
O
Available or set automatically.
–
Not available.
221
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Tab Item Reference Page
5
Certication Logo Display
=
176
Custom shooting mode (C1, C2)*
2
=
108
Copyright Info
=
177
Reset camera*
3
=
177
*1 Not available in these modes: [
], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and
[
].
*2 Not available in these modes: [
], [ ], [ ], and [ ].
*3 Only [Other settings] is available in [
] and [ ] modes.
My Menu Tab
Tab Item Reference Page
1
Add My Menu tab
=
109
Delete all My Menu tabs
=
110
Delete all items
=
110
Menu display
=
110
Set Up Tab
Tab Item Reference Page
1
Create Folder
=
170
File Numbering
=
170
Format
=
171
Video system
=
172
Display settings
=
28
Electronic level
=
52
Start-up Image
=
175
2
Eco Mode
=
173
Power Saving
=
27
Disp. Brightness
=
173
Night Display
=
172
Time Zone
=
174
Date/Time
=
174
Lens Retraction
=
174
3
Language
=
175
Mute
=
175
Volume
=
175
Sound Options
=
175
Hints & Tips
=
176
Mode icon size/info*
1
=
176
4
Touch Operation
=
176
Units
=
176
Wi-Fi connect’n
=
141
Wireless settings
=
141
GPS settings
=
164
222
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Handling Precautions
● The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or
subjecting it to strong impact.
● Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that
generate strong electromagnetic elds. Strong electromagnetic elds
may cause malfunction or erase image data.
● The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater.
● To maximize the camera’s dust- and drip- resistance, keep the terminal
cover, memory card/battery cover, and all other covers rmly closed.
● This camera is designed to be dust- and drip- resistant, in order to
help prevent sand, dust, dirt, or water that falls on it unexpectedly from
getting inside, but it is impossible to prevent dirt, dust, water, or salt
from getting inside at all. As far as possible, do not allow dirt, dust,
water, and salt to get on the camera.
● If water gets on the camera, wipe it off with a dry and clean cloth. If
dirt, dust, or salt gets on the camera, wipe it off with a clean, well-
wrung wet cloth.
● Using the camera in a location with large amounts of dirt or dust may
cause a malfunction.
● Cleaning the camera after use is recommended. Allowing dirt, dust,
water, or salt to remain on the camera may cause a malfunction.
● If you accidentally drop the camera into water or are concerned that
moisture (water), dirt, dust, or salt may have gotten inside it, promptly
consult the nearest Customer Support Help Desk.
● Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera
or screen.
● Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difcult,
contact a Customer Support Help Desk.
● Store unused battery packs in a plastic bag or other container. To
maintain battery performance if you will not use the battery pack for
some time, about once a year charge it and then use the camera until
it runs out of power before storing the battery pack.
Playback Tab
Tab Item Reference Page
1
Protect
=
121
Rotate
=
125
Erase
=
123
Favorites
=
126
Slideshow
=
121
2
Story Highlights
=
136
List/Play Digest Movies
=
114
Short Clip Mix
=
139
Image Search
=
116
Creative lters
=
130
3
Resize
=
128
Cropping
=
129
Red-Eye Correction
=
131
Face ID Info
=
115
RAW img processing
=
132
4
Print settings
=
195
Photobook Set-up
=
197
5
Transition Effect
=
111
Index Effect
=
115
Scroll Display
=
111
Group Images
=
118
Auto Rotate
=
126
Resume
=
111
Image jump w/
=
117
6
Set Touch Actions
=
127
Playback information display
=
113
223
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shutter
Shutter Speed
Auto Mode (automatic settings)
Max. Tv ......................................... 1 sec.
Min. Tv .......................................... 1/2000 sec.
Range in all shooting modes
Max. Tv ......................................... 30 sec.
Min. Tv .......................................... 1/2000 sec.
Aperture
F number
Wide angle ........................................ 2.8 - 16.0
Telephoto .......................................... 5.6 - 16.0
Flash
Built-in Flash
Flash range (Max. wide angle)
closest point ..................................Approx. 50.0 cm (approx. 1.6 ft.)
farthest point ................................. Approx. 9.0 m (approx. 29.5 ft.)
Flash range (Telephoto end)
closest point ..................................Approx. 50.0 cm (approx. 1.6 ft.)
farthest point ................................. Approx. 4.5 m (approx. 14.8 ft.)
Viewnder/Monitor
Electronic color viewnder
Screen Size ......................................0.39 type
Pixels ................................................Approx. 2.36 million dots
Monitor
Type .................................................. TFT color liquid crystal
Screen Size ......................................3.0 type
Effective Pixels .................................Approx. 1.04 million dots
Specications
Image Sensor
Image size ........................................APS-C
Camera Effective Pixels
(Pixels may decrease due to image
processing)
......................................... Approx. 24.2 megapixels
Total pixels ........................................ Approx. 25.8 megapixels
Lens
Focal Length
(35mm lm equivalent) .......................... 15.0 - 45.0 mm (24 - 72 mm)
Zoom Magnication ..........................3x
Shooting Range (measured from the tip of the lens)
Shooting
Mode
Focus
Range
Maximum Wide Angle
( )
Maximum Telephoto
( )
–
10 cm ‒ innity
(3.9 in. – innity)
30 cm ‒ innity
(11.8 in. – innity)
Other
modes
10 cm ‒ innity
(3.9 in. – innity)
30 cm ‒ innity
(11.8 in. – innity)
10 – 50 cm
(3.9 in. ‒ 1.6 ft.)
–
Step Zoom ........................................ 24 mm, 28 mm, 35 mm, 50 mm,
72 mm
224
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Recording
File Format ............................................ DCF-compliant DPOF compatible
(Version1.1)
Data Type
Still Images
Recording Format ......................... Exif2.3 (DCF2.0)
Image (RAW images taken while
shooting are A/D converted into
12-bit format.)
.................................. JPEG/RAW (CR2 a Canon 14-bit
RAW format)
Movies
Recording Format ......................... MP4
Video.............................................MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Audio ............................................MPEG-4 AAC-LC (stereo)
Shooting
Digital zoom
Magnication.....................................Approx. 4x
Maximum with optical zoom..............Approx. 12x
Focal Length (Telephoto end,
35mm lm equivalent)
........................... Approx. 288 mm equivalent
Continuous Shooting
Shooting speed*
One-Shot AF
High-speed Continuous
shooting speed .........................Max approx. 9.0 shots/sec.
Servo AF
High-speed Continuous
shooting speed .........................Max approx. 7.0 shots/sec.
* Continuous shooting speed may become slower due to the following factors:
Tv value/Av value/Subject conditions/Brightness/Shooting with ash/Zoom
positions/Battery level
225
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Interface
Wired
Digital terminal
(Hi-Speed USB compliant) ....................Micro USB
HDMI OUT terminal ..........................Type D
Wireless
NFC ................................................. NFC Forum Type3/4 Tag compliant
(Dynamic)
Bluetooth
Compliance standards ................. Bluetooth Ver. 4.1
(Bluetooth low energy technology)
Transmission scheme ...................GFSK modulation scheme
Wi-Fi
Compliance standards ................. IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Transmission frequency
Frequency ................................. 2.4 GHz
Channels .................................. 1 – 11
Security
Infrastructure mode ................. WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP),
WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP), WEP
* Wi-Fi Protected Setup compliant
Camera access point mode ..... WPA2-PSK (AES)
Ad hoc mode ........................... WPA2-PSK (AES)
Power
Battery Pack ......................................... NB-13L
Number of Still Image
Shots (CIPA compliant:
room temperature
23°C / 73°F)
Screen (Monitor) On Approx. 200 shots
Viewnder On Approx. 200 shots
Number of Still Image
Shots (Eco Mode On)
Screen (Monitor) On Approx. 250 shots
Movie Recording Time
(CIPA compliant: room
temperature 23°C / 73°F)
Screen (Monitor) On Approx. 45 min.
Viewnder On Approx. 45 min.
Movie Recording Time
(Continuous Shooting)
Screen (Monitor) On Approx. 80 min.
Viewnder On Approx. 80 min.
Playback Time* Approx. 4 hr.
* Time when playing back a slideshow of still images
226
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Battery Pack NB-13L
Type: Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Nominal voltage: 3.6 V DC
Nominal capacity: 1250 mAh
Charging cycles: Approx. 300 times
Operating temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
Rated input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
0.09 A (100 V) – 0.06 A (240 V)
Rated output: 4.2 V DC, 0.7 A
Charging time: Approx. 2 hr. 10 min. (when using NB-13L)
Operating temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E
Rated input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
0.07 A (100 V) – 0.045 A (240 V)
Rated output: 5.0 V DC, 0.55 A
Charging time: Approx. 2 hr. 50 min.* (when charged with
NB-13L in the camera)
* Charging time varies greatly depending on the
remaining battery level.
Operating temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
● Size, weight, and number of shots available are based on
measurement guidelines of the Camera & Imaging Products
Association (CIPA).
● Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording
time may be less than mentioned above.
● Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.
Operating Environment
Temperature ......................................... Min. 0 °C, max. 40 °C
(Min. 32 °F, max. 104 °F)
Dimensions (CIPA Compliant)
W .......................................................... Approx. 115.0 mm (approx. 4.5 in.)
H ........................................................... Approx. 77.9 mm (approx. 3.1 in.)
D ...........................................................Approx. 51.4 mm (approx. 2.0 in.)
Weight (CIPA Compliant)
Camera Body Only ............................... Approx. 375 g (approx. 13.2 oz.)
Including Battery Pack, Memory Card
.... Approx. 399 g (approx. 14.1 oz.)
227
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Index
A
Accessories 181
AEB shooting 81
AE lock 78
AF frames 91
AF lock 95
AF method 91
Art bold effect (shooting mode) 63
Aspect ratio 49
Auto Lighting Optimizer 82
Auto mode (shooting mode) 23, 35
Auto power down 27
Av (shooting mode) 100
B
Batteries
→
Date/time
(date/time battery)
Battery charger 181
Battery pack
Charging 19
Eco mode 173
Level 204
Power saving 27
Bluetooth 141
C
Camera
Resetting 177
Camera access point mode 148
Camera Connect 142
CameraWindow 189
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 154
Clock 34
Color (white balance) 83
Compression 50
Connecting via an access point 150
Continuous shooting 40, 44
Creative lters 130
Cropping 129, 192
Custom white balance 83
D
Date/time
Changing 22
Date/time battery 22
Settings 21
World clock 174
Defaults
→
Resetting
Digital tele-converter 91
Digital zoom 42
Display language 23
DPOF 194
Dragging 17
E
Eco mode 173
Editing
Cropping 129
Red-eye correction 131
Resizing images 128
Editing or erasing connection
information 167
Electronic level 52
Erasing 123
Erasing all 124
Error messages 202
Exposure
AE lock 78
Compensation 78
FE lock 97
F
Face ID 45
Face select 94
Favorites 126
FE lock 97
File numbering 170
Fireworks (shooting mode) 57
Fish-eye effect (shooting mode) 63
Flash
Deactivating ash 96
Flash exposure compensation 97
On 96
Slow synchro 96
Focus bracketing 90
Focus check 120
Focusing
AF frames 91
AF lock 95
MF peaking 90
Servo AF 93
Touch AF 95
Focus lock 91
Focus range
Macro 88
Manual focus 89
Quick 58
Underwater macro 58
FUNC. menu layout 108
G
Geotagging images 164
GPS information display 113
Grainy B/W (shooting mode) 62
H
Handheld night scene
(shooting mode) 57
HDMI cable 183
High dynamic range
(shooting mode) 66
High ISO speed noise reduction 80
Hybrid Auto (shooting mode) 37
I
Image quality
→
Compression
Images
Display period 55
Erasing 123
Playback
→
Viewing
Protecting 121
Image stabilization 53, 98
Image Sync 162
Indicator 33, 54, 55
ISO speed 80
J
Jump display 117
M
Macro (focus range) 88
Magnied display 120
Manual focus (focus range) 89
Manual (movie mode) 102
Memory cards 2
Menu
Basic operations 31
Table 207
Metering mode 79
Miniature effect (shooting mode) 65
228
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Star (shooting mode) 67
Star nightscape
(shooting mode) 67
Star time-lapse movie
(shooting mode) 68
Star trails (shooting mode) 67
Story Highlights 136
Strap 2
T
Terminal 183, 191
Time-lapse movie (shooting mode) 75
Touch Actions 127
Touch AF 95
Touching 17
Touch-screen panel 17
Touch Shutter 44
Toy camera effect (shooting mode) 64
Traveling with the camera 174
Troubleshooting 198
TV display 183
Tv (shooting mode) 99
U
Underwater macro (focus range) 58
Underwater (shooting mode) 58
V
Viewing 24
Image search 116
Index display 115
Jump display 117
Magnied display 120
Single-image display 24
Slideshow 121
TV display 183
W
Water painting effect
(shooting mode) 64
White balance (color) 83
Wi-Fi 141
Wind lter 74
Wireless features 141
World clock 174
Z
Zoom 23, 36, 42, 88
Movies
Editing 134
Image quality (recording pixels/
frame rate) 51
N
ND lter 81
Neck strap
→
Strap
P
P (shooting mode) 77
Package contents 2
Panning (shooting mode) 61
Panoramic shot (shooting mode) 60
Photobook set-up 197
PictBridge 182, 191
Picture Style 85
Playback
→
Viewing
Portrait (shooting mode) 56
Power 181
→
Battery charger
→
Battery pack
Power saving 27
Printing 191
→
Printing
Program AE 77
Protecting 121
Q
Quick (focus range) 58
Quick Set menu 209
R
RAW 50
RAW image processing 132
Recording pixels (image size) 50
Red-eye correction 131
Remote live view shooting 165
Resetting 177
Resizing images 128
Rotating 125
S
Saving images to a computer 189
Screen
Display language 23
Icons 204, 205
Menu
→
Quick Set menu, Menu
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
→
Memory cards
Searching 116
Self portrait (shooting mode) 59
Self-timer 42
2-second self-timer 43
Customizing the self-timer 43
Sending images 159
Sending images to another
camera 159
Sending images to a smartphone 142
Sending images to Web services 154
Servo AF 93
Shooting
Shooting date/time
→
Date/time
Shooting information 204
Shooting information
Long exposure 103
Short clips (movie mode) 74
Slideshow 121
Smooth skin (shooting mode) 60
Soft focus (shooting mode) 62
Software
Installation 149, 189
Saving images to a computer 189
Sounds 175
Standard (movie mode) 72
229
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Precautions for Wireless Features (Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or
Others)
• Countries and Regions Permitting Wireless Function Use
- Use of wireless functions is restricted in some countries and regions,
and illegal use may be punishable under national or local regulations.
To avoid violating wireless regulations, visit the Canon website to
check where use is allowed.
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from
wireless function use in other countries and regions.
• Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:
- Altering or modifying the product
- Removing the certication labels from the product
• Before goods or technologies in the camera regulated by the Foreign
Exchange and Foreign Trade Act are exported (which includes bringing
them outside Japan or showing them to non-residents in Japan), export
or service transaction permission may be required from the Japanese
government.
• Because this product includes American encryption items, it falls under
U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported to or
brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.
• Be sure to make notes of the Wi-Fi settings you use.
The wireless settings saved to this product may change or be erased due
to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio waves or static
electricity, or accident or malfunction.
Please note that Canon accepts no responsibility for direct or
indirect damages or loss of earnings resulting from a degradation or
disappearance of content.
• When transferring ownership, disposing of the product, or sending it for
repair, restore the default wireless settings by erasing any settings you
have entered.
• Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or
theft of the product.
Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from
unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this product
due to loss or theft of the product.
• Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.
Be sure to use the wireless function of this product within the guidelines
noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss
if the function and product are used in ways other than as described in
this guide.
• Do not use the wireless function of this product near medical equipment
or other electronic equipment.
Use of the wireless function near medical equipment or other electronic
equipment may affect operation of those devices.
Radio Wave Interference Precautions
• This product may receive interference from other devices that emit radio
waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far away as
possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the same time
as this product.
Security Precautions
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.
• Only use networks you are authorized to use.
This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays the
results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use (unknown
networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to connect to or
using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized access. Be sure
to use only networks you are authorized to use, and do not attempt to
connect to other unknown networks.
230
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE
OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
• AES-128 Library
Copyright (c) 1998-2008, Brian Gladman, Worcester, UK. All rights
reserved.
LICENSE TERMS
The redistribution and use of this software (with or without changes) is
allowed without the payment of fees or royalties provided that:
1. source code distributions include the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer;
2. binary distributions include the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in their documentation;
3. the name of the copyright holder is not used to endorse products built
using this software without specic written permission.
DISCLAIMER
This software is provided 'as is' with no explicit or implied warranties in
respect of its properties, including, but not limited to, correctness and/or
tness for purpose.
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
• Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions and
attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
• Unauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard to
cover their tracks when inltrating other systems).
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly
secure your Wi-Fi network.
Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of
Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security
settings.
Third-Party Software
• expat.h
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
copy of this software and associated documentation les (the “Software”),
to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software
is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
231
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wireless Features
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
• This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding
MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and
non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the
AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted
or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.
Disclaimer
• Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.
• All measurements based on Canon testing standards.
• Information subject to change without notice, as are product
specications and appearance.
• Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the
actual equipment.
• The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any
loss arising from the use of this product.
Personal Information and Security Precautions
If personal information and/or Wi-Fi security settings, such as passwords,
etc., are saved on the camera, please be aware that such information and
settings may still remain in the camera.
When transferring the camera to another person, disposing of it, or sending
it for repair, be sure to take the following measures to prevent the leakage
of such information and settings.
• Erase registered personal information by choosing [Erase Info] in the
Face ID settings.
• Erase registered Wi-Fi security information by choosing [Reset Settings]
in the Wi-Fi settings.
Trademarks and Licensing
• Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
• App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.
• The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
• HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
• Wi-Fi
®
, Wi-Fi Alliance
®
, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
• The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Canon Inc. is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective
owners.
• The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc. in
the United States and in other countries.
• All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
• This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
